Extend the assembler so that it can automatically generate GNU Build attribute notes...
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset H8/300
44 @set H8
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset SH
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset HPPA
50 @set abnormal-separator
51 @end ifset
52 @c ------------
53 @ifset GENERIC
54 @settitle Using @value{AS}
55 @end ifset
56 @ifclear GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
58 @end ifclear
59 @setchapternewpage odd
60 @c %**end of header
61
62 @c @smallbook
63 @c @set SMALL
64 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
65 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
66 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
67 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
68 @c
69 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
70 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
71 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
72 @c break.
73 @c
74 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
75 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
76 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
77 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
78 @c discretion, of course.
79 @ifinfo
80 @set SMALL
81 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
82 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
83 @end ifinfo
84
85 @ifnottex
86 @dircategory Software development
87 @direntry
88 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
89 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
90 @end direntry
91 @end ifnottex
92
93 @finalout
94 @syncodeindex ky cp
95
96 @copying
97 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
98
99 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
100 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
101
102 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
103 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
104 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
105 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
106 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
107 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
108
109 @c man end
110 @end copying
111
112 @titlepage
113 @title Using @value{AS}
114 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
115 @ifclear GENERIC
116 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
117 @end ifclear
118 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
119 @sp 1
120 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
121 @end ifset
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
124 @sp 1
125 @sp 13
126 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
127 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
128 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
129 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
130 distracting the boss while they got some work
131 done.
132 @sp 3
133 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
134 @page
135 @tex
136 {\parskip=0pt
137 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
138 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
139 }
140 %"boxit" macro for figures:
141 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
142 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
143 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
144 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
145 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
146 @end tex
147
148 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
149 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
150
151 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
152 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
153 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
154 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
155 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
156 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
157
158 @end titlepage
159 @contents
160
161 @ifnottex
162 @node Top
163 @top Using @value{AS}
164
165 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
166 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
167 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
168 @end ifset
169 version @value{VERSION}.
170 @ifclear GENERIC
171 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
172 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
173 @end ifclear
174
175 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
176 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
177 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
178
179 @menu
180 * Overview:: Overview
181 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
182 * Syntax:: Syntax
183 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
184 * Symbols:: Symbols
185 * Expressions:: Expressions
186 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
187 @ifset ELF
188 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
189 @end ifset
190 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
191 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
192 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
193 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
194 * AS Index:: AS Index
195 @end menu
196 @end ifnottex
197
198 @node Overview
199 @chapter Overview
200 @iftex
201 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
202 @ifclear GENERIC
203 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
204 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
205 @end ifclear
206 @end iftex
207
208 @cindex invocation summary
209 @cindex option summary
210 @cindex summary of options
211 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
212 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
213
214 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
215
216 @ignore
217 @c man begin SEEALSO
218 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
219 @c man end
220 @end ignore
221
222 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
223 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
224 @smallexample
225 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
226 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
227 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
228 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
229 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
230 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
231 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
232 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
233 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
234 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
235 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
236 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
237 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
238 [@b{--statistics}]
239 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
240 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
241 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
242 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
243 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
244 [@b{--generate-missing-build-notes=[no|yes]}]
245 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
246 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
247 @c
248 @c man end
249 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
250 @c Add an empty line for separation.
251 @c man begin TARGET
252 @ifset AARCH64
253
254 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
255 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
256 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
257 @end ifset
258 @ifset ALPHA
259
260 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
261 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
262 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
263 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
264 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
265 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
266 @end ifset
267 @ifset ARC
268
269 @emph{Target ARC options:}
270 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
271 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
272 [@b{-mcode-density}]
273 [@b{-mrelax}]
274 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
275 @end ifset
276 @ifset ARM
277
278 @emph{Target ARM options:}
279 @c Don't document the deprecated options
280 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
281 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
282 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
283 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
284 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
285 [@b{-mthumb}]
286 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
287 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
288 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
289 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
290 @end ifset
291 @ifset Blackfin
292
293 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
294 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
295 [@b{-mfdpic}]
296 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
297 [@b{-mnopic}]
298 @end ifset
299 @ifset CRIS
300
301 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
302 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
303 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
304 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
305 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
306 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
307 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
308 @end ifset
309 @ifset D10V
310
311 @emph{Target D10V options:}
312 [@b{-O}]
313 @end ifset
314 @ifset D30V
315
316 @emph{Target D30V options:}
317 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
318 @end ifset
319 @ifset EPIPHANY
320
321 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
322 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
323 @end ifset
324 @ifset H8
325
326 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
327 [-h-tick-hex]
328 @end ifset
329 @ifset HPPA
330 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
331 @end ifset
332 @ifset I80386
333
334 @emph{Target i386 options:}
335 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
336 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
337 @end ifset
338 @ifset IA64
339
340 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
341 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
342 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
343 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
344 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
345 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
346 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
347 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
348 @end ifset
349 @ifset IP2K
350
351 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
352 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
353 @end ifset
354 @ifset M32C
355
356 @emph{Target M32C options:}
357 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset M32R
360
361 @emph{Target M32R options:}
362 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
363 @b{--W[n]p}]
364 @end ifset
365 @ifset M680X0
366
367 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
368 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
369 @end ifset
370 @ifset M68HC11
371
372 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
373 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
374 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
375 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
376 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
377 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
378 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset MCORE
381
382 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
383 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
384 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
385 @end ifset
386 @ifset METAG
387
388 @emph{Target Meta options:}
389 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
390 @end ifset
391 @ifset MICROBLAZE
392 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
393 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
394 @end ifset
395 @ifset MIPS
396
397 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
398 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
399 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
400 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
401 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
402 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
403 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
404 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
405 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
406 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
407 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
408 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
409 [@b{-mignore-branch-isa}] [@b{-mno-ignore-branch-isa}]
410 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
411 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
412 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
413 [@b{-mmips16e2}] [@b{-mno-mips16e2}]
414 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
415 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
416 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
417 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
418 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
419 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
420 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
421 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
422 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
423 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
424 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
425 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
426 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
427 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
428 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
429 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
430 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
431 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
432 @end ifset
433 @ifset MMIX
434
435 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
436 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
437 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
438 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
439 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
440 @end ifset
441 @ifset NIOSII
442
443 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
444 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
445 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
446 @end ifset
447 @ifset NDS32
448
449 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
450 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
451 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
452 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
453 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
454 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
455 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
456 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
457 [@b{-mb2bb}]
458 @end ifset
459 @ifset PDP11
460
461 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
462 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
463 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
464 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
465 @end ifset
466 @ifset PJ
467
468 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
469 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
470 @end ifset
471 @ifset PPC
472
473 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
474 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
475 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
476 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
477 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
478 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
479 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
480 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mspe2}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
481 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
482 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
483 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
484 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
485 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
486 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
487 @end ifset
488 @ifset PRU
489
490 @emph{Target PRU options:}
491 [@b{-link-relax}]
492 [@b{-mnolink-relax}]
493 [@b{-mno-warn-regname-label}]
494 @end ifset
495 @ifset RISCV
496
497 @emph{Target RISC-V options:}
498 [@b{-fpic}|@b{-fPIC}|@b{-fno-pic}]
499 [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
500 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
501 @end ifset
502 @ifset RL78
503
504 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
505 [@b{-mg10}]
506 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
507 @end ifset
508 @ifset RX
509
510 @emph{Target RX options:}
511 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
512 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
513 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
514 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
515 [@b{-mpid}]
516 [@b{-mrelax}]
517 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
518 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
519 @end ifset
520 @ifset S390
521
522 @emph{Target s390 options:}
523 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
524 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
525 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
526 @end ifset
527 @ifset SCORE
528
529 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
530 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
531 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
532 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
533 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
534 @end ifset
535 @ifset SPARC
536
537 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
538 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
539 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
540 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
541 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
542 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
543 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
544 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
545 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
546 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
547 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
548 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
549 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
550 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
551 @b{-bump}]
552 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
553 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
554 @end ifset
555 @ifset TIC54X
556
557 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
558 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
559 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
560 @end ifset
561 @ifset TIC6X
562
563 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
564 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
565 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
566 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
567 @end ifset
568 @ifset TILEGX
569
570 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
571 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
572 @end ifset
573 @ifset TILEPRO
574 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
575 @end ifset
576 @ifset VISIUM
577
578 @emph{Target Visium options:}
579 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
580 @end ifset
581 @ifset XTENSA
582
583 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
584 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
585 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
586 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
587 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
588 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
589 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
590 @end ifset
591 @ifset Z80
592
593 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
594 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
595 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
596 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
597 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
598 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
599 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
600 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
601 @end ifset
602 @ifset Z8000
603
604 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
605 @end ifset
606
607 @c man end
608 @end smallexample
609
610 @c man begin OPTIONS
611
612 @table @gcctabopt
613 @include at-file.texi
614
615 @item -a[cdghlmns]
616 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
617
618 @table @gcctabopt
619 @item -ac
620 omit false conditionals
621
622 @item -ad
623 omit debugging directives
624
625 @item -ag
626 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
627
628 @item -ah
629 include high-level source
630
631 @item -al
632 include assembly
633
634 @item -am
635 include macro expansions
636
637 @item -an
638 omit forms processing
639
640 @item -as
641 include symbols
642
643 @item =file
644 set the name of the listing file
645 @end table
646
647 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
648 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
649 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
650
651 @item --alternate
652 Begin in alternate macro mode.
653 @ifclear man
654 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
655 @end ifclear
656
657 @item --compress-debug-sections
658 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
659 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
660 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
661 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
662
663 @ifset ELF
664 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
665 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
666 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
667 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
668 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
669 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
670 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
671 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
672 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
673 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
674 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
675 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
676 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
677 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
678 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
679
680 @end ifset
681
682 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
683 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
684 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
685 override this.
686
687 @item -D
688 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
689 other assemblers.
690
691 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
692 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
693 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
694
695 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
696 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
697 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
698 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
699 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
700 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
701
702 @item -f
703 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
704 compiler output).
705
706 @item -g
707 @itemx --gen-debug
708 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
709 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
710 ECOFF or DWARF2.
711
712 @item --gstabs
713 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
714 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
715
716 @item --gstabs+
717 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
718 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
719 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
720 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
721 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
722
723 @item --gdwarf-2
724 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
725 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
726 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
727
728 @item --gdwarf-sections
729 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
730 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
731 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
732 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
733 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
734 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
735 suffix.
736
737 @ifset ELF
738 @item --size-check=error
739 @itemx --size-check=warning
740 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
741
742 @item --elf-stt-common=no
743 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
744 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
745 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
746 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
747
748 @item --generate-missing-build-notes=yes
749 @itemx --generate-missing-build-notes=no
750 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate GNU Build
751 attribute notes if none are present in the input sources.
752 The default can be controlled by the @option{--enable-generate-build-notes}
753 configure option.
754
755 @end ifset
756
757 @item --help
758 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
759
760 @item --target-help
761 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
762
763 @item -I @var{dir}
764 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
765
766 @item -J
767 Don't warn about signed overflow.
768
769 @item -K
770 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
771 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
772 @end ifclear
773 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
774 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
775 @end ifset
776
777 @item -L
778 @itemx --keep-locals
779 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
780 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
781 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
782 @ifclear man
783 @xref{Symbol Names}.
784 @end ifclear
785
786 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
787 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
788 listing to @var{number}.
789
790 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
791 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
792 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
793
794 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
795 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
796 @var{number} bytes.
797
798 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
799 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
800 to @var{number} + 1.
801
802 @item --no-pad-sections
803 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
804 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
805 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
806
807 @item -o @var{objfile}
808 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
809
810 @item -R
811 Fold the data section into the text section.
812
813 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
814 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
815 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
816 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
817 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
818 requirements at the expense of speed.
819
820 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
821 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
822 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
823 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
824
825 @ifset ELF
826 @item --sectname-subst
827 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
828 @ifclear man
829 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
830 @end ifclear
831 @end ifset
832
833 @item --statistics
834 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
835 assembly.
836
837 @item --strip-local-absolute
838 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
839
840 @item -v
841 @itemx -version
842 Print the @command{as} version.
843
844 @item --version
845 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
846
847 @item -W
848 @itemx --no-warn
849 Suppress warning messages.
850
851 @item --fatal-warnings
852 Treat warnings as errors.
853
854 @item --warn
855 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
856
857 @item -w
858 Ignored.
859
860 @item -x
861 Ignored.
862
863 @item -Z
864 Generate an object file even after errors.
865
866 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
867 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
868
869 @end table
870 @c man end
871
872 @ifset AARCH64
873
874 @ifclear man
875 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
876 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
877 @end ifclear
878
879 @ifset man
880 @c man begin OPTIONS
881 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
882 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
883 @c man end
884 @c man begin INCLUDE
885 @include c-aarch64.texi
886 @c ended inside the included file
887 @end ifset
888
889 @end ifset
890
891 @ifset ALPHA
892
893 @ifclear man
894 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
895 for an Alpha processor.
896 @end ifclear
897
898 @ifset man
899 @c man begin OPTIONS
900 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
901 processor.
902 @c man end
903 @c man begin INCLUDE
904 @include c-alpha.texi
905 @c ended inside the included file
906 @end ifset
907
908 @end ifset
909
910 @c man begin OPTIONS
911 @ifset ARC
912 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
913 processor.
914
915 @table @gcctabopt
916 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
917 This option selects the core processor variant.
918 @item -EB | -EL
919 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
920 @item -mcode-density
921 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
922 @end table
923 @end ifset
924
925 @ifset ARM
926 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
927 processor family.
928
929 @table @gcctabopt
930 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
931 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
932 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
933 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
934 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
935 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
936 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
937 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
938 @item -mthumb
939 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
940 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
941 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
942 @item -EB | -EL
943 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
944 @item -mthumb-interwork
945 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
946 ARM code in mind.
947 @item -mccs
948 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
949 @item -k
950 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
951 @end table
952 @end ifset
953 @c man end
954
955 @ifset Blackfin
956
957 @ifclear man
958 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
959 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
960 @end ifclear
961
962 @ifset man
963 @c man begin OPTIONS
964 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
965 the Blackfin processor family.
966 @c man end
967 @c man begin INCLUDE
968 @include c-bfin.texi
969 @c ended inside the included file
970 @end ifset
971
972 @end ifset
973
974 @c man begin OPTIONS
975 @ifset CRIS
976 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
977 @end ifset
978
979 @ifset D10V
980 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
981 a D10V processor.
982 @table @gcctabopt
983 @cindex D10V optimization
984 @cindex optimization, D10V
985 @item -O
986 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
987 @end table
988 @end ifset
989
990 @ifset D30V
991 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
992 processor.
993 @table @gcctabopt
994 @cindex D30V optimization
995 @cindex optimization, D30V
996 @item -O
997 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
998
999 @cindex D30V nops
1000 @item -n
1001 Warn when nops are generated.
1002
1003 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
1004 @item -N
1005 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
1006 @end table
1007 @end ifset
1008 @c man end
1009
1010 @ifset EPIPHANY
1011 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1012 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
1013
1014 @ifclear man
1015 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1016 configured for an Epiphany processor.
1017 @end ifclear
1018
1019 @ifset man
1020 @c man begin OPTIONS
1021 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1022 an Epiphany processor.
1023 @c man end
1024 @c man begin INCLUDE
1025 @include c-epiphany.texi
1026 @c ended inside the included file
1027 @end ifset
1028
1029 @end ifset
1030
1031 @ifset H8300
1032
1033 @ifclear man
1034 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1035 for an H8/300 processor.
1036 @end ifclear
1037
1038 @ifset man
1039 @c man begin OPTIONS
1040 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1041 processor.
1042 @c man end
1043 @c man begin INCLUDE
1044 @include c-h8300.texi
1045 @c ended inside the included file
1046 @end ifset
1047
1048 @end ifset
1049
1050 @ifset I80386
1051
1052 @ifclear man
1053 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1054 configured for an i386 processor.
1055 @end ifclear
1056
1057 @ifset man
1058 @c man begin OPTIONS
1059 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1060 an i386 processor.
1061 @c man end
1062 @c man begin INCLUDE
1063 @include c-i386.texi
1064 @c ended inside the included file
1065 @end ifset
1066
1067 @end ifset
1068
1069 @c man begin OPTIONS
1070 @ifset IP2K
1071 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1072 Ubicom IP2K series.
1073
1074 @table @gcctabopt
1075
1076 @item -mip2022ext
1077 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1078
1079 @item -mip2022
1080 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1081 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1082
1083 @end table
1084 @end ifset
1085
1086 @ifset M32C
1087 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1088 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1089
1090 @table @gcctabopt
1091
1092 @item -m32c
1093 Assemble M32C instructions.
1094
1095 @item -m16c
1096 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1097
1098 @item -relax
1099 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1100
1101 @item -h-tick-hex
1102 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1103
1104 @end table
1105 @end ifset
1106
1107 @ifset M32R
1108 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1109 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1110
1111 @table @gcctabopt
1112
1113 @item --m32rx
1114 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1115 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1116
1117 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1118 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1119 encountered.
1120
1121 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1122 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1123 encountered.
1124
1125 @end table
1126 @end ifset
1127
1128 @ifset M680X0
1129 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1130 Motorola 68000 series.
1131
1132 @table @gcctabopt
1133
1134 @item -l
1135 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1136
1137 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1138 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1139 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1140 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1141 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1142
1143 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1144 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1145 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1146 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1147 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1148 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1149
1150 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1151 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1152 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1153
1154 @end table
1155 @end ifset
1156
1157 @ifset NIOSII
1158
1159 @ifclear man
1160 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1161 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1162 @end ifclear
1163
1164 @ifset man
1165 @c man begin OPTIONS
1166 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1167 Altera Nios II processor.
1168 @c man end
1169 @c man begin INCLUDE
1170 @include c-nios2.texi
1171 @c ended inside the included file
1172 @end ifset
1173 @end ifset
1174
1175 @ifset PDP11
1176
1177 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1178 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1179
1180 @table @gcctabopt
1181 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1182 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1183 default is @option{-mpic}.
1184
1185 @item -mall
1186 @itemx -mall-extensions
1187 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1188
1189 @item -mno-extensions
1190 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1191
1192 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1193 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1194
1195 @item -m@var{cpu}
1196 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1197 disable all other extensions.
1198
1199 @item -m@var{machine}
1200 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1201 model, and disable all other extensions.
1202 @end table
1203
1204 @end ifset
1205
1206 @ifset PJ
1207 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1208 a picoJava processor.
1209
1210 @table @gcctabopt
1211
1212 @cindex PJ endianness
1213 @cindex endianness, PJ
1214 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1215 @item -mb
1216 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1217
1218 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1219 @item -ml
1220 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1221
1222 @end table
1223 @end ifset
1224
1225 @ifset PRU
1226
1227 @ifclear man
1228 @xref{PRU Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1229 for a PRU processor.
1230 @end ifclear
1231
1232 @ifset man
1233 @c man begin OPTIONS
1234 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1235 PRU processor.
1236 @c man end
1237 @c man begin INCLUDE
1238 @include c-pru.texi
1239 @c ended inside the included file
1240 @end ifset
1241 @end ifset
1242
1243 @ifset M68HC11
1244 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1245 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1246
1247 @table @gcctabopt
1248
1249 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1250 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1251 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1252
1253 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1254 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1255 XGATE address space.
1256
1257 @item -mshort
1258 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1259
1260 @item -mlong
1261 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1262
1263 @item -mshort-double
1264 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1265
1266 @item -mlong-double
1267 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1268
1269 @item --force-long-branches
1270 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1271 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1272 sub routine.
1273
1274 @item -S | --short-branches
1275 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1276 when the offset is out of range.
1277
1278 @item --strict-direct-mode
1279 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1280 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1281
1282 @item --print-insn-syntax
1283 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1284
1285 @item --print-opcodes
1286 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1287
1288 @item --generate-example
1289 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1290 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1291
1292 @end table
1293 @end ifset
1294
1295 @ifset SPARC
1296 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1297 for the SPARC architecture:
1298
1299 @table @gcctabopt
1300 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1301 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1302 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1303
1304 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1305 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1306
1307 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1308 UltraSPARC extensions.
1309
1310 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1311 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1312 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1313
1314 @item -bump
1315 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1316 @end table
1317 @end ifset
1318
1319 @ifset TIC54X
1320 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1321 architecture.
1322
1323 @table @gcctabopt
1324 @item -mfar-mode
1325 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1326 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1327 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1328 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1329 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1330 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1331 behaviour in the shell.
1332 @end table
1333 @end ifset
1334
1335 @ifset MIPS
1336 @c man begin OPTIONS
1337 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1338 a MIPS processor.
1339
1340 @table @gcctabopt
1341 @item -G @var{num}
1342 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1343 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1344 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1345
1346 @cindex MIPS endianness
1347 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1348 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1349 @item -EB
1350 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1351
1352 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1353 @item -EL
1354 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1355
1356 @cindex MIPS ISA
1357 @item -mips1
1358 @itemx -mips2
1359 @itemx -mips3
1360 @itemx -mips4
1361 @itemx -mips5
1362 @itemx -mips32
1363 @itemx -mips32r2
1364 @itemx -mips32r3
1365 @itemx -mips32r5
1366 @itemx -mips32r6
1367 @itemx -mips64
1368 @itemx -mips64r2
1369 @itemx -mips64r3
1370 @itemx -mips64r5
1371 @itemx -mips64r6
1372 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1373 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1374 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1375 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1376 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1377 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1378 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1379 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1380 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1381 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1382
1383 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1384 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1385
1386 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1387 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1388
1389 @item -mfix7000
1390 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1391 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1392 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1393
1394 @item -mfix-rm7000
1395 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1396 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1397 followed by a load instruction.
1398
1399 @item -mdebug
1400 @itemx -no-mdebug
1401 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1402 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1403
1404 @item -mpdr
1405 @itemx -mno-pdr
1406 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1407
1408 @item -mgp32
1409 @itemx -mfp32
1410 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1411 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1412 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1413 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1414
1415 @item -mgp64
1416 @itemx -mfp64
1417 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1418 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1419 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1420 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1421
1422 @item -mfpxx
1423 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1424 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1425 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1426 32 or 64 bits wide.
1427
1428 @item -modd-spreg
1429 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1430 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1431 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1432 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1433
1434 @item -mips16
1435 @itemx -no-mips16
1436 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1437 @code{.module mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1438 turns off this option.
1439
1440 @item -mmips16e2
1441 @itemx -mno-mips16e2
1442 Enable the use of MIPS16e2 instructions in MIPS16 mode. This is equivalent
1443 to putting @code{.module mips16e2} at the start of the assembly file.
1444 @samp{-mno-mips16e2} turns off this option.
1445
1446 @item -mmicromips
1447 @itemx -mno-micromips
1448 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1449 @code{.module micromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1450 @samp{-mno-micromips} turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting
1451 @code{.module nomicromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1452
1453 @item -msmartmips
1454 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1455 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1456 equivalent to putting @code{.module smartmips} at the start of the assembly
1457 file. @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1458
1459 @item -mips3d
1460 @itemx -no-mips3d
1461 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1462 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1463 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1464
1465 @item -mdmx
1466 @itemx -no-mdmx
1467 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1468 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1469 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1470
1471 @item -mdsp
1472 @itemx -mno-dsp
1473 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1474 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1475 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1476
1477 @item -mdspr2
1478 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1479 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1480 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1481 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1482 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1483
1484 @item -mdspr3
1485 @itemx -mno-dspr3
1486 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1487 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1488 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1489 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1490
1491 @item -mmsa
1492 @itemx -mno-msa
1493 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1494 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1495 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1496
1497 @item -mxpa
1498 @itemx -mno-xpa
1499 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1500 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1501 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1502
1503 @item -mmt
1504 @itemx -mno-mt
1505 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1506 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1507 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1508
1509 @item -mmcu
1510 @itemx -mno-mcu
1511 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1512 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1513 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1514
1515 @item -minsn32
1516 @itemx -mno-insn32
1517 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1518 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1519 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1520 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1521 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1522 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1523 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1524
1525 @item --construct-floats
1526 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1527 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1528 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1529 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1530 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1531 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1532
1533 @item --relax-branch
1534 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1535 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1536 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1537 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1538
1539 @item -mignore-branch-isa
1540 @itemx -mno-ignore-branch-isa
1541 Ignore branch checks for invalid transitions between ISA modes. The
1542 semantics of branches does not provide for an ISA mode switch, so in
1543 most cases the ISA mode a branch has been encoded for has to be the
1544 same as the ISA mode of the branch's target label. Therefore GAS has
1545 checks implemented that verify in branch assembly that the two ISA
1546 modes match. @samp{-mignore-branch-isa} disables these checks. By
1547 default @samp{-mno-ignore-branch-isa} is selected, causing any invalid
1548 branch requiring a transition between ISA modes to produce an error.
1549
1550 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1551 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1552 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1553
1554 @cindex emulation
1555 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1556 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1557 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1558 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1559 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1560
1561 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1562 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1563 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1564 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1565 preferred options instead.
1566
1567 @item -nocpp
1568 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1569 the native tools.
1570
1571 @item --trap
1572 @itemx --no-trap
1573 @itemx --break
1574 @itemx --no-break
1575 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1576 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1577 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1578 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1579 break exception.
1580
1581 @item -n
1582 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1583 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1584 @end table
1585 @c man end
1586 @end ifset
1587
1588 @ifset MCORE
1589 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1590 an MCore processor.
1591
1592 @table @gcctabopt
1593 @item -jsri2bsr
1594 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1595 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1596 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1597
1598 @item -sifilter
1599 @itemx -nosifilter
1600 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1601 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1602
1603 @item -relax
1604 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1605
1606 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1607 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1608 can be assembled.
1609
1610 @item -EB
1611 Assemble for a big endian target.
1612
1613 @item -EL
1614 Assemble for a little endian target.
1615
1616 @end table
1617 @end ifset
1618 @c man end
1619
1620 @ifset METAG
1621
1622 @ifclear man
1623 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1624 for a Meta processor.
1625 @end ifclear
1626
1627 @ifset man
1628 @c man begin OPTIONS
1629 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1630 Meta processor.
1631 @c man end
1632 @c man begin INCLUDE
1633 @include c-metag.texi
1634 @c ended inside the included file
1635 @end ifset
1636
1637 @end ifset
1638
1639 @c man begin OPTIONS
1640 @ifset MMIX
1641 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1642 @end ifset
1643
1644 @ifset NDS32
1645
1646 @ifclear man
1647 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1648 for a NDS32 processor.
1649 @end ifclear
1650 @c ended inside the included file
1651 @end ifset
1652
1653 @ifset man
1654 @c man begin OPTIONS
1655 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1656 NDS32 processor.
1657 @c man end
1658 @c man begin INCLUDE
1659 @include c-nds32.texi
1660 @c ended inside the included file
1661 @end ifset
1662
1663 @c man end
1664 @ifset PPC
1665
1666 @ifclear man
1667 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1668 for a PowerPC processor.
1669 @end ifclear
1670
1671 @ifset man
1672 @c man begin OPTIONS
1673 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1674 PowerPC processor.
1675 @c man end
1676 @c man begin INCLUDE
1677 @include c-ppc.texi
1678 @c ended inside the included file
1679 @end ifset
1680
1681 @end ifset
1682
1683 @ifset RISCV
1684
1685 @ifclear man
1686 @xref{RISC-V-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1687 for a RISC-V processor.
1688 @end ifclear
1689
1690 @ifset man
1691 @c man begin OPTIONS
1692 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1693 RISC-V processor.
1694 @c man end
1695 @c man begin INCLUDE
1696 @include c-riscv.texi
1697 @c ended inside the included file
1698 @end ifset
1699
1700 @end ifset
1701
1702 @c man begin OPTIONS
1703 @ifset RX
1704 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1705 @end ifset
1706
1707 @ifset S390
1708 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1709 processor family.
1710
1711 @table @gcctabopt
1712 @item -m31
1713 @itemx -m64
1714 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1715 @item -mesa
1716 @item -mzarch
1717 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1718 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1719 @item -march=@var{processor}
1720 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1721 @samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1722 @samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1723 @samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1724 @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}), or @samp{z14} (or @samp{arch12}).
1725 @item -mregnames
1726 @itemx -mno-regnames
1727 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1728 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1729 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1730 but evaluates to zero.
1731 @end table
1732 @end ifset
1733 @c man end
1734
1735 @ifset TIC6X
1736
1737 @ifclear man
1738 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1739 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1740 @end ifclear
1741
1742 @ifset man
1743 @c man begin OPTIONS
1744 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1745 TMS320C6000 processor.
1746 @c man end
1747 @c man begin INCLUDE
1748 @include c-tic6x.texi
1749 @c ended inside the included file
1750 @end ifset
1751
1752 @end ifset
1753
1754 @ifset TILEGX
1755
1756 @ifclear man
1757 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1758 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1759 @end ifclear
1760
1761 @ifset man
1762 @c man begin OPTIONS
1763 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1764 processor.
1765 @c man end
1766 @c man begin INCLUDE
1767 @include c-tilegx.texi
1768 @c ended inside the included file
1769 @end ifset
1770
1771 @end ifset
1772
1773 @ifset VISIUM
1774
1775 @ifclear man
1776 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1777 for a Visium processor.
1778 @end ifclear
1779
1780 @ifset man
1781 @c man begin OPTIONS
1782 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1783 processor.
1784 @c man end
1785 @c man begin INCLUDE
1786 @include c-visium.texi
1787 @c ended inside the included file
1788 @end ifset
1789
1790 @end ifset
1791
1792 @ifset XTENSA
1793
1794 @ifclear man
1795 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1796 for an Xtensa processor.
1797 @end ifclear
1798
1799 @ifset man
1800 @c man begin OPTIONS
1801 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1802 Xtensa processor.
1803 @c man end
1804 @c man begin INCLUDE
1805 @include c-xtensa.texi
1806 @c ended inside the included file
1807 @end ifset
1808
1809 @end ifset
1810
1811 @c man begin OPTIONS
1812
1813 @ifset Z80
1814 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1815 a Z80 family processor.
1816 @table @gcctabopt
1817 @item -z80
1818 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1819 @item -r800
1820 Assemble for R800 processor.
1821 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1822 @itemx -Wnud
1823 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1824 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1825 @itemx -Wnup
1826 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1827 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1828 @itemx -Wud
1829 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1830 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1831 @itemx -Wup
1832 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1833 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1834 @itemx -Fud
1835 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1836 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1837 @itemx -Fup
1838 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1839 @end table
1840 @end ifset
1841
1842 @c man end
1843
1844 @menu
1845 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1846 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1847 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1848 * Command Line:: Command Line
1849 * Input Files:: Input Files
1850 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1851 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1852 @end menu
1853
1854 @node Manual
1855 @section Structure of this Manual
1856
1857 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1858 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1859 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1860 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1861 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1862
1863 @ifclear GENERIC
1864 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1865 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1866 @end ifclear
1867 @ifset GENERIC
1868 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1869 various flavors of the assembler.
1870 @end ifset
1871
1872 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1873 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1874 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1875 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1876 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1877 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1878 particular architecture.
1879 @ifset GENERIC
1880 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1881 machine architecture manual for this information.
1882 @end ifset
1883 @ifclear GENERIC
1884 @ifset H8/300
1885 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1886 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1887 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1888 @end ifset
1889 @ifset SH
1890 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1891 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1892 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1893 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1894 @end ifset
1895 @ifset Z8000
1896 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1897 @end ifset
1898 @end ifclear
1899
1900 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1901 @ignore
1902 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1903 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1904 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1905 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1906 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1907 qualification.
1908
1909 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1910 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1911 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1912 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1913 @end ignore
1914
1915 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1916 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1917 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1918 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1919 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1920 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1921 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1922 @c directives).
1923
1924 @node GNU Assembler
1925 @section The GNU Assembler
1926
1927 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1928
1929 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1930 @ifclear GENERIC
1931 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1932 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1933 @end ifclear
1934 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1935 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1936 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1937 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1938 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1939
1940 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1941 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1942 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1943 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1944 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1945 machine would assemble.
1946 @ifset VAX
1947 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1948 @end ifset
1949 @ifset M680X0
1950 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1951 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1952 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1953 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1954 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1955 @end ifset
1956
1957 @c man end
1958
1959 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1960 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1961 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1962
1963 @node Object Formats
1964 @section Object File Formats
1965
1966 @cindex object file format
1967 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1968 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1969 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1970 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1971 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1972 @ifclear GENERIC
1973 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1974 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1975 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1976 @end ifclear
1977 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1978 @ifset HPPA
1979 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1980 SOM or ELF format object files.
1981 @end ifset
1982 @end ifclear
1983
1984 @node Command Line
1985 @section Command Line
1986
1987 @cindex command line conventions
1988
1989 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1990 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1991 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1992 significant.
1993
1994 @cindex standard input, as input file
1995 @kindex --
1996 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1997 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1998
1999 @cindex options, command line
2000 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
2001 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
2002 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
2003 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
2004 the letter is important. All options are optional.
2005
2006 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
2007 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
2008 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
2009 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
2010
2011 @smallexample
2012 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
2013 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
2014 @end smallexample
2015
2016 @node Input Files
2017 @section Input Files
2018
2019 @cindex input
2020 @cindex source program
2021 @cindex files, input
2022 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
2023 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
2024 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
2025 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
2026
2027 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
2028 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
2029 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
2030 order specified.
2031
2032 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2033 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
2034 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
2035 (The standard input is also a file.)
2036
2037 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
2038 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
2039 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
2040 is taken to be an input file name.
2041
2042 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
2043 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
2044 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
2045 to assemble.
2046
2047 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2048 in your command line.
2049
2050 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2051 file.
2052
2053 @c man end
2054
2055 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2056
2057 @cindex input file linenumbers
2058 @cindex line numbers, in input files
2059 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2060 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2061 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2062 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2063
2064 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2065 to @command{@value{AS}}.
2066
2067 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2068 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2069 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2070 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2071 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2072 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2073
2074 @node Object
2075 @section Output (Object) File
2076
2077 @cindex object file
2078 @cindex output file
2079 @kindex a.out
2080 @kindex .o
2081 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2082 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2083 is the object file. Its default name is @code{a.out}.
2084 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2085 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2086 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2087 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2088 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2089
2090 @cindex linker
2091 @kindex ld
2092 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2093 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2094 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2095 information for the debugger.
2096
2097 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2098 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2099
2100 @node Errors
2101 @section Error and Warning Messages
2102
2103 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2104
2105 @cindex error messages
2106 @cindex warning messages
2107 @cindex messages from assembler
2108 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2109 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2110 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2111 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2112 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2113
2114 @c man end
2115
2116 @cindex format of warning messages
2117 Warning messages have the format
2118
2119 @smallexample
2120 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2121 @end smallexample
2122
2123 @noindent
2124 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2125 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2126 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2127 @ifset GENERIC
2128 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2129 @end ifset
2130 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2131 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2132 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2133
2134 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2135 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2136
2137 @smallexample
2138 .file 2 "bar.c"
2139 error_assembler_source
2140 .file "foo.c"
2141 .line 30
2142 error_c_source
2143 @end smallexample
2144
2145 produces this output:
2146
2147 @smallexample
2148 Assembler messages:
2149 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2150 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2151 @end smallexample
2152
2153 @cindex format of error messages
2154 Error messages have the format
2155
2156 @smallexample
2157 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2158 @end smallexample
2159
2160 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2161 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2162 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2163
2164 @node Invoking
2165 @chapter Command-Line Options
2166
2167 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2168 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2169 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2170 for options specific
2171 @ifclear GENERIC
2172 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2173 @end ifclear
2174 @ifset GENERIC
2175 to particular machine architectures.
2176 @end ifset
2177
2178 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2179
2180 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2181 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2182 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2183 by commas. For example:
2184
2185 @smallexample
2186 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2187 @end smallexample
2188
2189 @noindent
2190 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2191 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2192 local symbols in the symbol table).
2193
2194 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2195 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2196 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2197 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2198 assembler.)
2199
2200 @c man end
2201
2202 @menu
2203 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2204 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2205 * D:: -D for compatibility
2206 * f:: -f to work faster
2207 * I:: -I for .include search path
2208 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2209 * K:: -K for compatibility
2210 @end ifclear
2211 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2212 * K:: -K for difference tables
2213 @end ifset
2214
2215 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2216 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2217 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2218 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2219 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2220 * o:: -o to name the object file
2221 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2222 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2223 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2224 * v:: -v to announce version
2225 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2226 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2227 @end menu
2228
2229 @node a
2230 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2231
2232 @kindex -a
2233 @kindex -ac
2234 @kindex -ad
2235 @kindex -ag
2236 @kindex -ah
2237 @kindex -al
2238 @kindex -an
2239 @kindex -as
2240 @cindex listings, enabling
2241 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2242
2243 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2244 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2245 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2246 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2247 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2248 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2249 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2250 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2251 also.
2252
2253 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2254 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2255
2256 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2257 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2258 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2259 omitted from the listing.
2260
2261 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2262 listing.
2263
2264 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2265 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2266 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2267 @code{.sbttl}.
2268 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2269 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2270 listing-control directives have no effect.
2271
2272 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2273 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2274
2275 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2276 because it
2277 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2278 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2279 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2280 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2281 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2282
2283 @node alternate
2284 @section @option{--alternate}
2285
2286 @kindex --alternate
2287 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2288
2289 @node D
2290 @section @option{-D}
2291
2292 @kindex -D
2293 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2294 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2295 @command{@value{AS}}.
2296
2297 @node f
2298 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2299
2300 @kindex -f
2301 @cindex trusted compiler
2302 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2303 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2304 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2305 and comment preprocessing on
2306 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2307 ,Preprocessing}.
2308
2309 @quotation
2310 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2311 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2312 not work correctly.
2313 @end quotation
2314
2315 @node I
2316 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2317
2318 @kindex -I @var{path}
2319 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2320 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2321 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2322 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2323 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2324 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2325 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2326 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2327 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2328 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2329
2330 @node K
2331 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2332
2333 @kindex -K
2334 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2335 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2336 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2337 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2338 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2339 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2340 alteration on other platforms.
2341 @end ifclear
2342
2343 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2344 @cindex difference tables, warning
2345 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2346 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2347 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2348 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2349 is done.
2350 @end ifset
2351
2352 @node L
2353 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2354
2355 @kindex -L
2356 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2357 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2358 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2359 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2360 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2361 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2362 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2363 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2364
2365 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2366 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2367 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2368
2369 @node listing
2370 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2371
2372 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2373 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2374 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2375 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2376 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2377 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2378 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2379 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2380
2381 @table @gcctabopt
2382 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2383 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2384 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2385 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2386 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2387
2388 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2389 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2390 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2391 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2392 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2393 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2394 switch is used the default is to one.
2395
2396 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2397 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2398 @cindex Width of source line output
2399 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2400 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2401 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2402
2403 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2404 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2405 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2406 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2407 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2408 @end table
2409
2410 @node M
2411 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2412
2413 @kindex -M
2414 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2415 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2416 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2417 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} assembler from Microtec Research.
2418 The exact nature of the
2419 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2420 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2421 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2422 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2423
2424 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2425 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2426 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2427 individually. These are:
2428
2429 @itemize @bullet
2430 @item global symbols in common section
2431
2432 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2433 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2434 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2435 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2436 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2437
2438 @item complex relocations
2439
2440 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2441 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2442 are not support by other object file formats.
2443
2444 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2445
2446 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2447 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2448 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2449 script.
2450
2451 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2452
2453 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2454 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2455
2456 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2457
2458 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2459 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2460 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2461 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2462 assigned within a linker script.
2463 @end itemize
2464
2465 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2466 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2467 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2468
2469 @itemize @bullet
2470
2471 @item EBCDIC strings
2472
2473 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2474
2475 @item packed binary coded decimal
2476
2477 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2478 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2479
2480 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2481
2482 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2483
2484 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2485
2486 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2487
2488 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2489
2490 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2491 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2492 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2493 these options serve no purpose.
2494
2495 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2496
2497 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2498 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2499 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2500
2501 @item other @code{OPT} options
2502
2503 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2504 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2505
2506 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2507
2508 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2509 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2510
2511 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2512
2513 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2514
2515 @end itemize
2516
2517 @node MD
2518 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2519
2520 @kindex --MD
2521 @cindex dependency tracking
2522 @cindex make rules
2523
2524 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2525 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2526 dependencies of the main source file.
2527
2528 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2529
2530 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2531
2532 @node no-pad-sections
2533 @section Output Section Padding
2534 @kindex --no-pad-sections
2535 @cindex output section padding
2536 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2537 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2538 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2539 disable this behaviour.
2540
2541 @node o
2542 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2543
2544 @kindex -o
2545 @cindex naming object file
2546 @cindex object file name
2547 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2548 default it has the name @file{a.out}.
2549 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2550 object file a different name.
2551
2552 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2553 existing file of the same name.
2554
2555 @node R
2556 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2557
2558 @kindex -R
2559 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2560 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2561 @cindex joining text and data sections
2562 @cindex merging text and data sections
2563 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2564 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2565 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2566 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2567 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2568 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2569
2570 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2571 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2572 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2573 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2574
2575 @ifset COFF-ELF
2576 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2577 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2578 @samp{.data}.
2579 @end ifset
2580
2581 @ifset HPPA
2582 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2583 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2584 @end ifset
2585
2586 @node statistics
2587 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2588
2589 @kindex --statistics
2590 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2591 @cindex time, total for assembly
2592 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2593 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2594 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2595 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2596 seconds).
2597
2598 @node traditional-format
2599 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2600
2601 @kindex --traditional-format
2602 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2603 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2604 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2605
2606 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2607 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2608
2609 @node v
2610 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2611
2612 @kindex -v
2613 @kindex -version
2614 @cindex assembler version
2615 @cindex version of assembler
2616 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2617 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2618 command line.
2619
2620 @node W
2621 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2622
2623 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2624 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2625 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2626 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2627
2628 @kindex -W
2629 @kindex --no-warn
2630 @cindex suppressing warnings
2631 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2632 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2633 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2634 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2635 are still reported.
2636
2637 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2638 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2639 @cindex warnings, causing error
2640 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2641 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2642
2643 @kindex --warn
2644 @cindex warnings, switching on
2645 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2646 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2647
2648 @node Z
2649 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2650 @cindex object file, after errors
2651 @cindex errors, continuing after
2652 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2653 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2654 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2655 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2656 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2657 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2658
2659 @node Syntax
2660 @chapter Syntax
2661
2662 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2663 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2664 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2665 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2666 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2667 @ifclear VAX
2668 assembler.
2669 @end ifclear
2670 @ifset VAX
2671 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2672 @end ifset
2673
2674 @menu
2675 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2676 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2677 * Comments:: Comments
2678 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2679 * Statements:: Statements
2680 * Constants:: Constants
2681 @end menu
2682
2683 @node Preprocessing
2684 @section Preprocessing
2685
2686 @cindex preprocessing
2687 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2688 @itemize @bullet
2689 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2690 @item
2691 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2692 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2693 a single space.
2694
2695 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2696 @item
2697 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2698 appropriate number of newlines.
2699
2700 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2701 @item
2702 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2703 @end itemize
2704
2705 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2706 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2707 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2708 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2709 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2710 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2711 Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
2712
2713 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2714 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2715 preprocessed.
2716
2717 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2718 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2719 @kindex #NO_APP
2720 @kindex #APP
2721 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2722 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2723 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2724 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2725 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2726 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2727 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2728 and whitespace.
2729
2730 @node Whitespace
2731 @section Whitespace
2732
2733 @cindex whitespace
2734 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2735 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2736 people to read. Unless within character constants
2737 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2738 as exactly one space.
2739
2740 @node Comments
2741 @section Comments
2742
2743 @cindex comments
2744 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2745 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2746
2747 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2748 This means you may not nest these comments.
2749
2750 @smallexample
2751 /*
2752 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2753 is to use this sort of comment.
2754 */
2755
2756 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2757 @end smallexample
2758
2759 @cindex line comment character
2760 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2761 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2762 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2763 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2764 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2765 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2766 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2767 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2768
2769 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2770 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2771 to specify logical line numbers:
2772
2773 @kindex #
2774 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2775 @cindex logical line numbers
2776 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2777 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2778 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2779 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2780 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2781
2782 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2783 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2784
2785 @smallexample
2786 # This is an ordinary comment.
2787 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2788 # This is logical line # 36.
2789 @end smallexample
2790 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2791 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2792
2793 @node Symbol Intro
2794 @section Symbols
2795
2796 @cindex characters used in symbols
2797 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2798 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2799 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2800 @samp{_.$}.
2801 @end ifclear
2802 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2803 @ifclear GENERIC
2804 @ifset H8
2805 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2806 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2807 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2808 symbol names.)
2809 @end ifset
2810 @end ifclear
2811 @end ifset
2812 @ifset GENERIC
2813 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2814 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2815 @end ifset
2816 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2817 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2818 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2819 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2820 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2821
2822 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2823 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2824 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2825 backslash @code{\} character.
2826 @cindex length of symbols
2827
2828 @node Statements
2829 @section Statements
2830
2831 @cindex statements, structure of
2832 @cindex line separator character
2833 @cindex statement separator character
2834
2835 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2836 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2837 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2838 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2839 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2840 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2841 exception: they do not end statements.
2842
2843 @cindex newline, required at file end
2844 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2845 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2846 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2847
2848 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2849
2850 @cindex instructions and directives
2851 @cindex directives and instructions
2852 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2853 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2854 @c 13feb91.
2855 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2856 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2857 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2858 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2859 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2860 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2861 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2862 @ifset GENERIC
2863 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2864 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2865 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2866 language.@refill
2867 @end ifset
2868
2869 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2870 @cindex label (@code{:})
2871 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2872 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2873 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2874
2875 @ifset HPPA
2876 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2877 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2878 only one label may be defined on each line.
2879 @end ifset
2880
2881 @smallexample
2882 label: .directive followed by something
2883 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2884 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2885 @end smallexample
2886
2887 @node Constants
2888 @section Constants
2889
2890 @cindex constants
2891 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2892 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2893 @smallexample
2894 @group
2895 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2896 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2897 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2898 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2899 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2900 @end group
2901 @end smallexample
2902
2903 @menu
2904 * Characters:: Character Constants
2905 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2906 @end menu
2907
2908 @node Characters
2909 @subsection Character Constants
2910
2911 @cindex character constants
2912 @cindex constants, character
2913 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2914 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2915 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2916 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2917 used in arithmetic expressions.
2918
2919 @menu
2920 * Strings:: Strings
2921 * Chars:: Characters
2922 @end menu
2923
2924 @node Strings
2925 @subsubsection Strings
2926
2927 @cindex string constants
2928 @cindex constants, string
2929 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2930 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2931 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2932 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2933 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2934 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2935 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2936 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2937
2938 @cindex escape codes, character
2939 @cindex character escape codes
2940 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
2941 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
2942 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
2943 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
2944 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
2945 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
2946 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
2947 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
2948 @table @kbd
2949 @c @item \a
2950 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2951 @c
2952 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
2953 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2954 @item \b
2955 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2956
2957 @c @item \e
2958 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2959 @c
2960 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
2961 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2962 @item backslash-f
2963 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2964
2965 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
2966 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2967 @item \n
2968 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2969
2970 @c @item \p
2971 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2972 @c
2973 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
2974 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
2975 @item \r
2976 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2977
2978 @c @item \s
2979 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2980 @c other assemblers.
2981 @c
2982 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
2983 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2984 @item \t
2985 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2986
2987 @c @item \v
2988 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2989 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2990 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2991 @c
2992 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2993 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2994 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2995 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2996 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2997 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2998
2999 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3000 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3001 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3002 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3003 lower case @code{x} works.
3004
3005 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3006 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3007 @item \\
3008 Represents one @samp{\} character.
3009
3010 @c @item \'
3011 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3012 @c This is needed in single character literals
3013 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3014 @c a @samp{'}.
3015 @c
3016 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3017 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3018 @item \"
3019 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3020 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3021
3022 @item \ @var{anything-else}
3023 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3024 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3025 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3026 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3027 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3028 code and warns you of the fact.
3029 @end table
3030
3031 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3032 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3033 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3034 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3035 sequence.
3036
3037 @node Chars
3038 @subsubsection Characters
3039
3040 @cindex single character constant
3041 @cindex character, single
3042 @cindex constant, single character
3043 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
3044 that character. Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
3045 @code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
3046 as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote. So if you want to write the
3047 character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
3048 the second @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
3049 accent. A newline
3050 @ifclear GENERIC
3051 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3052 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3053 @end ifclear
3054 @ifset abnormal-separator
3055 @ifset H8
3056 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3057 Renesas SH)
3058 @end ifset
3059 @end ifset
3060 @end ifclear
3061 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3062 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3063 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3064 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3065 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3066
3067 @node Numbers
3068 @subsection Number Constants
3069
3070 @cindex constants, number
3071 @cindex number constants
3072 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3073 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3074 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3075 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3076 are floating point numbers, described below.
3077
3078 @menu
3079 * Integers:: Integers
3080 * Bignums:: Bignums
3081 * Flonums:: Flonums
3082 @ifclear GENERIC
3083 @end ifclear
3084 @end menu
3085
3086 @node Integers
3087 @subsubsection Integers
3088 @cindex integers
3089 @cindex constants, integer
3090
3091 @cindex binary integers
3092 @cindex integers, binary
3093 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3094 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3095
3096 @cindex octal integers
3097 @cindex integers, octal
3098 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3099 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3100
3101 @cindex decimal integers
3102 @cindex integers, decimal
3103 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3104 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3105
3106 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3107 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3108 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3109 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3110
3111 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3112 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3113 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3114
3115 @node Bignums
3116 @subsubsection Bignums
3117
3118 @cindex bignums
3119 @cindex constants, bignum
3120 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3121 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3122 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3123 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3124
3125 @node Flonums
3126 @subsubsection Flonums
3127 @cindex flonums
3128 @cindex floating point numbers
3129 @cindex constants, floating point
3130
3131 @cindex precision, floating point
3132 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3133 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3134 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3135 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3136 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3137 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3138
3139 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3140 @itemize @bullet
3141 @item
3142 The digit @samp{0}.
3143 @ifset HPPA
3144 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3145 @end ifset
3146
3147 @item
3148 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3149 @ifset GENERIC
3150 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3151 @ignore
3152 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3153 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3154 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3155 @end ignore
3156
3157 On the H8/300 and Renesas / SuperH SH architectures, the letter must be
3158 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3159
3160 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3161 (in upper or lower case).
3162
3163 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3164 @end ifset
3165 @ifclear GENERIC
3166 @ifset ARC
3167 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3168 @end ifset
3169 @ifset H8
3170 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3171 @end ifset
3172 @ifset HPPA
3173 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3174 @end ifset
3175 @end ifclear
3176
3177 @item
3178 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3179
3180 @item
3181 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3182
3183 @item
3184 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3185 or more decimal digits.
3186
3187 @item
3188 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3189
3190 @itemize @bullet
3191 @item
3192 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3193 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3194 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3195 @item
3196 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3197 @item
3198 One or more decimal digits.
3199 @end itemize
3200
3201 @end itemize
3202
3203 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3204 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3205
3206 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3207 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3208 @command{@value{AS}}.
3209
3210 @node Sections
3211 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3212 @cindex sections
3213 @cindex relocation
3214
3215 @menu
3216 * Secs Background:: Background
3217 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3218 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3219 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3220 * bss:: bss Section
3221 @end menu
3222
3223 @node Secs Background
3224 @section Background
3225
3226 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3227 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3228 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3229
3230 @cindex linker, and assembler
3231 @cindex assembler, and linker
3232 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3233 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3234 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3235 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3236 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3237 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3238 sections.
3239
3240 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3241 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3242 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3243 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3244 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3245 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3246 the proper run-time addresses.
3247 @ifset H8
3248 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3249 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3250 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3251 @end ifset
3252
3253 @cindex standard assembler sections
3254 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3255 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3256 @dfn{bss} sections.
3257
3258 @ifset COFF-ELF
3259 @ifset GENERIC
3260 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3261 @end ifset
3262 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3263 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3264 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3265 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3266 @end ifset
3267
3268 @ifset HPPA
3269 @ifset GENERIC
3270 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3271 @end ifset
3272 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3273 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3274 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3275 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3276 assembler directives.
3277
3278 @ifset SOM
3279 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3280 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3281 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3282 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3283 @end ifset
3284 @end ifset
3285
3286 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3287 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3288
3289 @ifset HPPA
3290 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3291 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3292 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3293 @end ifset
3294
3295 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3296 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3297 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3298 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3299 file is mentioned:
3300 @itemize @bullet
3301 @item
3302 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3303 an address?
3304 @item
3305 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3306 @item
3307 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3308 @display
3309 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3310 @end display
3311 @item
3312 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3313 @end itemize
3314
3315 @cindex addresses, format of
3316 @cindex section-relative addressing
3317 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3318 @display
3319 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3320 @end display
3321 @noindent
3322 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3323 nature.
3324 @ifset SOM
3325 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3326 symbol-relative instead.)
3327 @end ifset
3328
3329 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3330 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3331
3332 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3333 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3334 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3335 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3336 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3337 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3338 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3339 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3340 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3341
3342 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3343 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3344 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3345 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3346 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3347 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3348 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3349
3350 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3351 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3352 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3353 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3354 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3355 data and bss sections.
3356
3357 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3358 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3359
3360 @node Ld Sections
3361 @section Linker Sections
3362 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3363
3364 @table @strong
3365
3366 @ifset COFF-ELF
3367 @cindex named sections
3368 @cindex sections, named
3369 @item named sections
3370 @end ifset
3371 @ifset aout
3372 @cindex text section
3373 @cindex data section
3374 @itemx text section
3375 @itemx data section
3376 @end ifset
3377 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3378 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3379 true of another.
3380 @c @ifset aout
3381 When the program is running, however, it is
3382 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3383 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3384 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3385 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3386 in the data section.
3387 @c @end ifset
3388
3389 @cindex bss section
3390 @item bss section
3391 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3392 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3393 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3394 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3395 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3396 those explicit zeros from object files.
3397
3398 @cindex absolute section
3399 @item absolute section
3400 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3401 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3402 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3403 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3404
3405 @cindex undefined section
3406 @item undefined section
3407 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3408 the preceding sections.
3409 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3410 @end table
3411
3412 @cindex relocation example
3413 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3414 @ifset COFF-ELF
3415 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3416 @end ifset
3417 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3418
3419 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3420 @ifnottex
3421 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3422 @smallexample
3423 +-----+----+--+
3424 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3425 +-----+----+--+
3426
3427 text data bss
3428 seg. seg. seg.
3429
3430 +---+---+---+
3431 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3432 +---+---+---+
3433
3434 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3435 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3436 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3437
3438 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3439 @end smallexample
3440 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3441 @end ifnottex
3442 @need 5000
3443 @tex
3444 \bigskip
3445 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3446 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3447 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3448
3449 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3450 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3451 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3452
3453 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3454 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3455 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3456 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3457 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3458
3459 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3460 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3461
3462 @end tex
3463 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3464
3465 @node As Sections
3466 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3467
3468 @cindex internal assembler sections
3469 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3470 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3471 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3472 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3473 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3474 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3475 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3476 section-relative address.
3477
3478 @table @b
3479 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3480 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3481 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3482 bug in the assembler.
3483
3484 @cindex expr (internal section)
3485 @item expr section
3486 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3487 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3488 it in the expr section.
3489 @c FIXME item debug
3490 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3491 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3492 @c FIXME item register
3493 @end table
3494
3495 @node Sub-Sections
3496 @section Sub-Sections
3497
3498 @cindex numbered subsections
3499 @cindex grouping data
3500 @ifset aout
3501 Assembled bytes
3502 @ifset COFF-ELF
3503 conventionally
3504 @end ifset
3505 fall into two sections: text and data.
3506 @end ifset
3507 You may have separate groups of
3508 @ifset GENERIC
3509 data in named sections
3510 @end ifset
3511 @ifclear GENERIC
3512 @ifclear aout
3513 data in named sections
3514 @end ifclear
3515 @ifset aout
3516 text or data
3517 @end ifset
3518 @end ifclear
3519 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3520 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3521 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3522 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3523 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3524 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3525 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3526 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3527 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3528 constants being output.
3529
3530 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3531 goes in subsection number zero.
3532
3533 @ifset GENERIC
3534 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3535 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3536 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3537 @end ifset
3538 @ifclear GENERIC
3539 @ifset H8
3540 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3541 boundary (two bytes).
3542 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3543 @end ifset
3544 @end ifclear
3545
3546 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3547 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3548 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3549 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3550 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3551 data subsections as a data section.
3552
3553 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3554 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3555 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3556 @ifset COFF
3557 @ifset GENERIC
3558 When generating COFF output, you
3559 @end ifset
3560 @ifclear GENERIC
3561 You
3562 @end ifclear
3563 can also use an extra subsection
3564 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3565 @var{expression}}.
3566 @end ifset
3567 @ifset ELF
3568 @ifset GENERIC
3569 When generating ELF output, you
3570 @end ifset
3571 @ifclear GENERIC
3572 You
3573 @end ifclear
3574 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3575 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3576 @end ifset
3577 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3578 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3579 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3580 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3581 @smallexample
3582 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3583 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3584 .text 1
3585 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3586 .data 0
3587 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3588 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3589 .text 0
3590 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3591 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3592 @end smallexample
3593
3594 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3595 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3596 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3597 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3598 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3599 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3600 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3601
3602 @node bss
3603 @section bss Section
3604
3605 @cindex bss section
3606 @cindex common variable storage
3607 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3608 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3609 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3610 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3611 section are zeroed bytes.
3612
3613 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3614 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3615
3616 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3617 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3618
3619 @ifset GENERIC
3620 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3621 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3622 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3623 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3624 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3625 @end ifset
3626
3627 @node Symbols
3628 @chapter Symbols
3629
3630 @cindex symbols
3631 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3632 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3633 to debug.
3634
3635 @quotation
3636 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3637 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3638 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3639 @end quotation
3640
3641 @menu
3642 * Labels:: Labels
3643 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3644 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3645 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3646 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3647 @end menu
3648
3649 @node Labels
3650 @section Labels
3651
3652 @cindex labels
3653 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3654 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3655 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3656 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3657 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3658 definitions.
3659
3660 @ifset HPPA
3661 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3662 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3663 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3664 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3665 @end ifset
3666
3667 @node Setting Symbols
3668 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3669
3670 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3671 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3672 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3673 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3674 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3675 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3676 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3677 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3678
3679 @ifset Blackfin
3680 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3681 @end ifset
3682
3683 @node Symbol Names
3684 @section Symbol Names
3685
3686 @cindex symbol names
3687 @cindex names, symbol
3688 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3689 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3690 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3691 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3692 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3693 particular target machine), and underscores.
3694 @end ifclear
3695 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3696 @ifset H8
3697 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3698 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3699 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3700 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3701 @end ifset
3702 @end ifset
3703
3704 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3705 than @code{Foo}.
3706
3707 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3708 Local Labels. See below.
3709
3710 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3711 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3712 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3713 currently supported.
3714
3715 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3716 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3717 in a program.
3718
3719 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3720
3721 @cindex local symbol names
3722 @cindex symbol names, local
3723 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3724 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3725 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3726 set of local label prefixes.
3727 @ifset HPPA
3728 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3729 @end ifset
3730
3731 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3732 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3733 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3734 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3735
3736 @subheading Local Labels
3737
3738 @cindex local labels
3739 @cindex temporary symbol names
3740 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3741 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3742 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3743 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3744 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3745 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3746 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3747 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3748 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3749 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3750
3751 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3752 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3753 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3754 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3755 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3756 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3757 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3758
3759 Here is an example:
3760
3761 @smallexample
3762 1: branch 1f
3763 2: branch 1b
3764 1: branch 2f
3765 2: branch 1b
3766 @end smallexample
3767
3768 Which is the equivalent of:
3769
3770 @smallexample
3771 label_1: branch label_3
3772 label_2: branch label_1
3773 label_3: branch label_4
3774 label_4: branch label_3
3775 @end smallexample
3776
3777 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3778 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3779 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3780 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3781 these parts:
3782
3783 @table @code
3784 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3785 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3786 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3787 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3788 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3789 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3790 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3791 you may use them in debugging.
3792
3793 @item @var{number}
3794 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3795 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3796
3797 @item @kbd{C-B}
3798 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3799 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3800
3801 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3802 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3803 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3804 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3805 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3806 @end table
3807
3808 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3809 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3810
3811 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3812 @cindex dollar local symbols
3813
3814 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3815 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3816 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3817 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3818 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3819 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3820
3821 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3822 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3823 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3824
3825 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3826 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3827 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3828 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3829
3830 @node Dot
3831 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3832
3833 @cindex dot (symbol)
3834 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3835 @cindex current address
3836 @cindex location counter
3837 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3838 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3839 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3840 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3841 directive.
3842 @ifclear no-space-dir
3843 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3844 @samp{.space 4}.
3845 @end ifclear
3846
3847 @node Symbol Attributes
3848 @section Symbol Attributes
3849
3850 @cindex symbol attributes
3851 @cindex attributes, symbol
3852 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3853 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3854 attributes.
3855 @ifset INTERNALS
3856 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3857 @end ifset
3858
3859 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3860 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3861 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3862 would want.
3863
3864 @menu
3865 * Symbol Value:: Value
3866 * Symbol Type:: Type
3867 @ifset aout
3868 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3869 @end ifset
3870 @ifset COFF
3871 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3872 @end ifset
3873 @ifset SOM
3874 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3875 @end ifset
3876 @end menu
3877
3878 @node Symbol Value
3879 @subsection Value
3880
3881 @cindex value of a symbol
3882 @cindex symbol value
3883 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3884 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3885 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3886 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3887 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3888 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3889 called absolute.
3890
3891 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3892 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3893 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3894 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3895 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3896 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3897 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3898 allocated storage.
3899
3900 @node Symbol Type
3901 @subsection Type
3902
3903 @cindex type of a symbol
3904 @cindex symbol type
3905 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3906 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3907 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3908 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3909
3910 @ifset aout
3911 @node a.out Symbols
3912 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3913
3914 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3915 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3916
3917 @menu
3918 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3919 * Symbol Other:: Other
3920 @end menu
3921
3922 @node Symbol Desc
3923 @subsubsection Descriptor
3924
3925 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3926 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3927 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3928 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3929 @command{@value{AS}}.
3930
3931 @node Symbol Other
3932 @subsubsection Other
3933
3934 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3935 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3936 @end ifset
3937
3938 @ifset COFF
3939 @node COFF Symbols
3940 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3941
3942 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3943 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3944
3945 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3946 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3947 @code{.endef} directives.
3948
3949 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3950
3951 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3952 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3953 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3954
3955 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3956
3957 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3958 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3959 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3960 table information for COFF.
3961 @end ifset
3962
3963 @ifset SOM
3964 @node SOM Symbols
3965 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3966
3967 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3968 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3969
3970 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3971 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3972
3973 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3974 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3975 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3976 @end ifset
3977
3978 @node Expressions
3979 @chapter Expressions
3980
3981 @cindex expressions
3982 @cindex addresses
3983 @cindex numeric values
3984 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3985 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3986
3987 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3988 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3989 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3990 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3991 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3992 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3993
3994 @menu
3995 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3996 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3997 @end menu
3998
3999 @node Empty Exprs
4000 @section Empty Expressions
4001
4002 @cindex empty expressions
4003 @cindex expressions, empty
4004 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4005 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4006 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4007 is compatible with other assemblers.
4008
4009 @node Integer Exprs
4010 @section Integer Expressions
4011
4012 @cindex integer expressions
4013 @cindex expressions, integer
4014 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4015 by @emph{operators}.
4016
4017 @menu
4018 * Arguments:: Arguments
4019 * Operators:: Operators
4020 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4021 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4022 @end menu
4023
4024 @node Arguments
4025 @subsection Arguments
4026
4027 @cindex expression arguments
4028 @cindex arguments in expressions
4029 @cindex operands in expressions
4030 @cindex arithmetic operands
4031 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4032 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4033 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4034 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4035 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4036 instruction operands.
4037
4038 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4039 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4040 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4041 integer.
4042
4043 Numbers are usually integers.
4044
4045 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4046 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4047 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4048 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4049 assemblers.
4050
4051 @cindex subexpressions
4052 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4053 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4054 operator followed by an argument.
4055
4056 @node Operators
4057 @subsection Operators
4058
4059 @cindex operators, in expressions
4060 @cindex arithmetic functions
4061 @cindex functions, in expressions
4062 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4063 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4064 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4065 whitespace.
4066
4067 @node Prefix Ops
4068 @subsection Prefix Operator
4069
4070 @cindex prefix operators
4071 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4072 one argument, which must be absolute.
4073
4074 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4075 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4076 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4077 @tex
4078 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4079 @end tex
4080
4081 @table @code
4082 @item -
4083 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4084 @item ~
4085 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4086 @end table
4087
4088 @tex
4089 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4090 @end tex
4091
4092 @node Infix Ops
4093 @subsection Infix Operators
4094
4095 @cindex infix operators
4096 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4097 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4098 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4099 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4100 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4101
4102 @enumerate
4103 @cindex operator precedence
4104 @cindex precedence of operators
4105
4106 @item
4107 Highest Precedence
4108
4109 @table @code
4110 @item *
4111 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4112
4113 @item /
4114 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4115
4116 @item %
4117 @dfn{Remainder}.
4118
4119 @item <<
4120 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4121
4122 @item >>
4123 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4124 @end table
4125
4126 @item
4127 Intermediate precedence
4128
4129 @table @code
4130 @item |
4131
4132 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4133
4134 @item &
4135 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4136
4137 @item ^
4138 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4139
4140 @item !
4141 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4142 @end table
4143
4144 @item
4145 Low Precedence
4146
4147 @table @code
4148 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4149 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4150 @cindex arguments for addition
4151 @item +
4152 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4153 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4154 sections.
4155
4156 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4157 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4158 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4159 @item -
4160 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4161 result has the section of the left argument.
4162 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4163 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4164 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4165
4166 @cindex comparison expressions
4167 @cindex expressions, comparison
4168 @item ==
4169 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4170 @item <>
4171 @itemx !=
4172 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4173 @item <
4174 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4175 @item >
4176 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4177 @item >=
4178 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4179 @item <=
4180 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4181
4182 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4183 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4184 perform signed comparisons.
4185 @end table
4186
4187 @item Lowest Precedence
4188
4189 @table @code
4190 @item &&
4191 @dfn{Logical And}.
4192
4193 @item ||
4194 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4195
4196 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4197 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4198 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4199 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4200
4201 @end table
4202 @end enumerate
4203
4204 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4205 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4206
4207 @node Pseudo Ops
4208 @chapter Assembler Directives
4209
4210 @cindex directives, machine independent
4211 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4212 @cindex machine independent directives
4213 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4214 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4215 in lower case.
4216
4217 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4218 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4219 @ifset GENERIC
4220 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4221 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4222 @end ifset
4223 @ifclear GENERIC
4224 @ifset machine-directives
4225 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4226 @end ifset
4227 @end ifclear
4228
4229 @menu
4230 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4231 @ifset COFF
4232 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4233 @end ifset
4234
4235 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4236 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4237 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4238 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4239 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4240 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4241 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4242 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4243 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4244 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4245 * Dc:: @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
4246 * Dcb:: @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4247 * Ds:: @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4248 @ifset COFF
4249 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4250 @end ifset
4251 @ifset aout
4252 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4253 @end ifset
4254 @ifset COFF
4255 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4256 @end ifset
4257
4258 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4259 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4260 * Else:: @code{.else}
4261 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4262 * End:: @code{.end}
4263 @ifset COFF
4264 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4265 @end ifset
4266
4267 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4268 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4269 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4270 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4271 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4272 * Err:: @code{.err}
4273 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4274 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4275 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4276 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4277 * File:: @code{.file}
4278 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4279 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4280 * Func:: @code{.func}
4281 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4282 @ifset ELF
4283 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4284 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4285 @end ifset
4286
4287 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4288 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4289 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4290 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4291 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4292 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4293 @ifset ELF
4294 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4295 @end ifset
4296
4297 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4298 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4299 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4300 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4301 @ifclear no-line-dir
4302 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4303 @end ifclear
4304
4305 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4306 * List:: @code{.list}
4307 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4308 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4309 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4310 @ifset ELF
4311 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4312 @end ifset
4313
4314 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4315 @ignore
4316 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4317 @end ignore
4318
4319 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4320 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4321 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4322 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4323 * Nops:: @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
4324 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4325 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4326 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4327 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4328 @ifset ELF
4329 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4330 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4331 @end ifset
4332
4333 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4334 @ifset ELF
4335 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4336 @end ifset
4337
4338 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4339 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4340 @ifset ELF
4341 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4342 @end ifset
4343
4344 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4345 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4346 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4347 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4348 @ifset COFF
4349 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4350 @end ifset
4351 @ifset COFF-ELF
4352 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4353 @end ifset
4354
4355 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4356 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4357 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4358 @ifset COFF-ELF
4359 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4360 @end ifset
4361 @ifclear no-space-dir
4362 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
4363 @end ifclear
4364
4365 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4366 @ifclear no-space-dir
4367 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
4368 @end ifclear
4369 @ifset have-stabs
4370 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4371 @end ifset
4372
4373 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4374 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4375 @ifset ELF
4376 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4377 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4378 @end ifset
4379
4380 @ifset COFF
4381 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4382 @end ifset
4383
4384 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4385 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4386 @ifset COFF-ELF
4387 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4388 @end ifset
4389
4390 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4391 @ifset COFF
4392 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4393 @end ifset
4394
4395 @ifset ELF
4396 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4397 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4398 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4399 @end ifset
4400
4401 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4402 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4403 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4404 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4405 @ifclear no-space-dir
4406 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4407 @end ifclear
4408 @ifset ELF
4409 * 2byte:: @code{.2byte @var{expressions}}
4410 * 4byte:: @code{.4byte @var{expressions}}
4411 * 8byte:: @code{.8byte @var{bignums}}
4412 @end ifset
4413 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4414 @end menu
4415
4416 @node Abort
4417 @section @code{.abort}
4418
4419 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4420 @cindex stopping the assembly
4421 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4422 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4423 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4424 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4425 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4426
4427 @ifset COFF
4428 @node ABORT (COFF)
4429 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4430
4431 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4432 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4433 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4434
4435 @end ifset
4436
4437 @node Align
4438 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4439
4440 @cindex padding the location counter
4441 @cindex @code{align} directive
4442 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4443 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4444 required, as described below.
4445
4446 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4447 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4448 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4449 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4450 with no-op instructions.
4451
4452 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4453 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4454 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4455 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4456 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4457 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4458 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4459
4460 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4461 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4462 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4463 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4464 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4465 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4466 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4467
4468 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4469 strongarm, it is the
4470 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4471 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4472 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4473 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4474
4475 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4476 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4477 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4478 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4479 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4480
4481 @node Altmacro
4482 @section @code{.altmacro}
4483 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4484
4485 @ftable @code
4486 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4487 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4488 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4489 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4490 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4491 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4492 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4493
4494 @item String delimiters
4495 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4496 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4497
4498 @table @code
4499 @item '@var{string}'
4500 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4501
4502 @item <@var{string}>
4503 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4504 @end table
4505
4506 @item single-character string escape
4507 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4508 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4509 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4510 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4511
4512 @item Expression results as strings
4513 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4514 and use the result as a string.
4515 @end ftable
4516
4517 @node Ascii
4518 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4519
4520 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4521 @cindex string literals
4522 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4523 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4524 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4525
4526 @node Asciz
4527 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4528
4529 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4530 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4531 @cindex null-terminated strings
4532 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4533 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4534
4535 @node Balign
4536 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4537
4538 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4539 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4540 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4541 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4542 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4543 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4544 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4545
4546 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4547 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4548 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4549 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4550 with no-op instructions.
4551
4552 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4553 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4554 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4555 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4556 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4557 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4558 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4559
4560 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4561 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4562 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4563 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4564 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4565 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4566 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4567 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4568 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4569 undefined.
4570
4571 @node Bundle directives
4572 @section Bundle directives
4573 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4574 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4575 @cindex bundle
4576 @cindex instruction bundle
4577 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4578 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4579 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4580 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4581 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4582 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4583 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4584
4585 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4586 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4587 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4588 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4589 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4590 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4591 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4592 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4593 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4594 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4595 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4596
4597 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4598 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4599 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4600 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4601 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4602 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4603 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4604 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4605 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4606
4607 @cindex bundle-locked
4608 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4609 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4610 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4611 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4612 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4613 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4614 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4615 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4616 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4617 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4618 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4619 bundle size.
4620
4621 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4622 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4623 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4624 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4625 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4626 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4627
4628 @node Byte
4629 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4630
4631 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4632 @cindex integers, one byte
4633 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4634 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4635
4636 @node CFI directives
4637 @section CFI directives
4638 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4639 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4640 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4641 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4642 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4643 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4644 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4645 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4646
4647 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4648 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4649
4650 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4651 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4652
4653 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4654 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4655 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4656 redefine it will result in an error.
4657
4658 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4659 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4660 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4661 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4662 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4663 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4664
4665 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4666 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4667
4668 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4669 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4670 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4671 unwind entry previously opened by
4672 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4673
4674 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4675 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4676 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4677 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4678 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4679 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4680 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4681 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4682 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4683 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4684 no personality routine.
4685
4686 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4687 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4688 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4689 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4690 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4691 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4692
4693 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4694 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4695 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4696 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4697 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4698 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4699 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4700 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4701
4702 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4703 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4704 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4705 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4706 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4707 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4708 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4709
4710 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4711 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4712 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4713 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4714 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4715 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4716
4717 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4718 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4719 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4720 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4721 by a section directive.
4722
4723 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4724 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4725 @code{.p2align} directive.
4726
4727 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4728 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4729 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4730
4731 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4732 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4733 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4734 remains the same.
4735
4736 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4737 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4738 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4739 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4740 CFA address.
4741
4742 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4743 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4744 value that is added/subtracted from the previous offset.
4745
4746 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4747 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4748 CFA.
4749
4750 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4751 Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4752
4753 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4754 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4755 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4756 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4757 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4758 code it's annotating.
4759
4760 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4761 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4762
4763 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4764 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4765 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4766 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4767
4768 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4769 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4770
4771 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4772 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4773 i.e. no restoration needed.
4774
4775 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4776 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4777 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4778 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4779 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4780 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4781 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4782
4783 @smallexample
4784 je label
4785 popq %rbx
4786 .cfi_restore %rbx
4787 popq %r12
4788 .cfi_restore %r12
4789 popq %rbp
4790 .cfi_restore %rbp
4791 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4792 ret
4793 label:
4794 /* Do something else */
4795 @end smallexample
4796
4797 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4798 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
4799 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4800 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4801 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4802 we can write:
4803
4804 @smallexample
4805 je label
4806 popq %rbx
4807 .cfi_remember_state
4808 .cfi_restore %rbx
4809 popq %r12
4810 .cfi_restore %r12
4811 popq %rbp
4812 .cfi_restore %rbp
4813 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4814 ret
4815 label:
4816 .cfi_restore_state
4817 /* Do something else */
4818 @end smallexample
4819
4820 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4821 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4822 @code{.cfi} directives.
4823
4824 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4825 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4826 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4827
4828 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4829 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4830
4831 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4832 SPARC register window has been saved.
4833
4834 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4835 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4836 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4837 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4838
4839 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4840 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4841 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4842 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4843
4844 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4845 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4846 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4847 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4848 or another register.
4849
4850 @node Comm
4851 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4852
4853 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4854 @cindex symbol, common
4855 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4856 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4857 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4858 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4859 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4860 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4861 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4862 using the largest size.
4863
4864 @ifset COFF-ELF
4865 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4866 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4867 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4868 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4869 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4870 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4871 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4872 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4873 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4874 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4875 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4876 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4877 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4878 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4879 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4880 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4881 @end ifset
4882
4883 @ifset HPPA
4884 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4885 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4886 @end ifset
4887
4888 @node Data
4889 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4890 @cindex @code{data} directive
4891
4892 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4893 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4894 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4895 to zero.
4896
4897 @node Dc
4898 @section @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
4899 @cindex @code{dc} directive
4900
4901 The @code{.dc} directive expects zero or more @var{expressions} separated by
4902 commas. These expressions are evaluated and their values inserted into the
4903 current section. The size of the emitted value depends upon the suffix to the
4904 @code{.dc} directive:
4905
4906 @table @code
4907 @item @samp{.a}
4908 Emits N-bit values, where N is the size of an address on the target system.
4909 @item @samp{.b}
4910 Emits 8-bit values.
4911 @item @samp{.d}
4912 Emits double precision floating-point values.
4913 @item @samp{.l}
4914 Emits 32-bit values.
4915 @item @samp{.s}
4916 Emits single precision floating-point values.
4917 @item @samp{.w}
4918 Emits 16-bit values.
4919 Note - this is true even on targets where the @code{.word} directive would emit
4920 32-bit values.
4921 @item @samp{.x}
4922 Emits long double precision floating-point values.
4923 @end table
4924
4925 If no suffix is used then @samp{.w} is assumed.
4926
4927 The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
4928 point values.
4929
4930 @node Dcb
4931 @section @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4932 @cindex @code{dcb} directive
4933 This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
4934 bytes. Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the
4935 comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. The
4936 @var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
4937
4938 @table @code
4939 @item @samp{.b}
4940 Emits single byte values.
4941 @item @samp{.d}
4942 Emits double-precision floating point values.
4943 @item @samp{.l}
4944 Emits 4-byte values.
4945 @item @samp{.s}
4946 Emits single-precision floating point values.
4947 @item @samp{.w}
4948 Emits 2-byte values.
4949 @item @samp{.x}
4950 Emits long double-precision floating point values.
4951 @end table
4952
4953 If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
4954
4955 The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
4956 point values.
4957
4958 @node Ds
4959 @section @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4960 @cindex @code{ds} directive
4961 This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
4962 bytes. Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the
4963 comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. The
4964 @var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
4965
4966 @table @code
4967 @item @samp{.b}
4968 Emits single byte values.
4969 @item @samp{.d}
4970 Emits 8-byte values.
4971 @item @samp{.l}
4972 Emits 4-byte values.
4973 @item @samp{.p}
4974 Emits 12-byte values.
4975 @item @samp{.s}
4976 Emits 4-byte values.
4977 @item @samp{.w}
4978 Emits 2-byte values.
4979 @item @samp{.x}
4980 Emits 12-byte values.
4981 @end table
4982
4983 Note - unlike the @code{.dcb} directive the @samp{.d}, @samp{.s} and @samp{.x}
4984 suffixes do not indicate that floating-point values are to be inserted.
4985
4986 If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
4987
4988 The byte ordering is target dependent.
4989
4990
4991 @ifset COFF
4992 @node Def
4993 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4994
4995 @cindex @code{def} directive
4996 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4997 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4998 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4999 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
5000 @end ifset
5001
5002 @ifset aout
5003 @node Desc
5004 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5005
5006 @cindex @code{desc} directive
5007 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5008 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5009 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5010 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5011
5012 @ifset COFF
5013 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5014 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5015 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5016 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5017 @end ifset
5018 @end ifset
5019
5020 @ifset COFF
5021 @node Dim
5022 @section @code{.dim}
5023
5024 @cindex @code{dim} directive
5025 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5026 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5027 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5028 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5029 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5030 @end ifset
5031
5032 @node Double
5033 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5034
5035 @cindex @code{double} directive
5036 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
5037 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5038 assembles floating point numbers.
5039 @ifset GENERIC
5040 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5041 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5042 @end ifset
5043 @ifclear GENERIC
5044 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5045 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5046 in @sc{ieee} format.
5047 @end ifset
5048 @end ifclear
5049
5050 @node Eject
5051 @section @code{.eject}
5052
5053 @cindex @code{eject} directive
5054 @cindex new page, in listings
5055 @cindex page, in listings
5056 @cindex listing control: new page
5057 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5058
5059 @node Else
5060 @section @code{.else}
5061
5062 @cindex @code{else} directive
5063 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5064 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5065 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5066 was false.
5067
5068 @node Elseif
5069 @section @code{.elseif}
5070
5071 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
5072 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5073 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5074 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5075
5076 @node End
5077 @section @code{.end}
5078
5079 @cindex @code{end} directive
5080 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5081 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5082
5083 @ifset COFF
5084 @node Endef
5085 @section @code{.endef}
5086
5087 @cindex @code{endef} directive
5088 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5089 @code{.def}.
5090 @end ifset
5091
5092 @node Endfunc
5093 @section @code{.endfunc}
5094 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5095 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5096
5097 @node Endif
5098 @section @code{.endif}
5099
5100 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5101 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5102 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5103 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5104
5105 @node Equ
5106 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5107
5108 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5109 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5110 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5111 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5112 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5113
5114 @ifset HPPA
5115 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5116 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5117 @end ifset
5118
5119 @ifset Z80
5120 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5121 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5122 On the Z80 it is an error if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5123 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5124 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5125 @end ifset
5126
5127 @node Equiv
5128 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5129 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5130 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5131 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5132 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5133 undefined.
5134
5135 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5136 @smallexample
5137 .ifdef SYM
5138 .err
5139 .endif
5140 .equ SYM,VAL
5141 @end smallexample
5142 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5143
5144 @node Eqv
5145 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5146 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5147 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5148 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5149 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5150 value is taken.
5151
5152 @node Err
5153 @section @code{.err}
5154 @cindex @code{err} directive
5155 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5156 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5157 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5158
5159 @node Error
5160 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5161 @cindex error directive
5162
5163 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5164 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5165 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5166 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5167
5168 @smallexample
5169 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5170 @end smallexample
5171
5172 @node Exitm
5173 @section @code{.exitm}
5174 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5175
5176 @node Extern
5177 @section @code{.extern}
5178
5179 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5180 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5181 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5182 all undefined symbols as external.
5183
5184 @node Fail
5185 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5186
5187 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5188 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5189 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5190 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5191 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5192 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5193
5194 @node File
5195 @section @code{.file}
5196 @cindex @code{file} directive
5197
5198 @ifclear no-file-dir
5199 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5200 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5201 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5202
5203 @subheading Default Version
5204
5205 @cindex logical file name
5206 @cindex file name, logical
5207 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5208 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5209
5210 @smallexample
5211 .file @var{string}
5212 @end smallexample
5213
5214 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5215 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5216 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5217 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5218 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5219
5220 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5221 @end ifclear
5222
5223 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5224 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5225
5226 @smallexample
5227 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5228 @end smallexample
5229
5230 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5231 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5232 literal.
5233
5234 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5235 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5236 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5237 entries will have.
5238
5239 @node Fill
5240 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5241
5242 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5243 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5244 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5245 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5246 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5247 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5248 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5249 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5250 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5251 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5252 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5253 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5254 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5255 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5256
5257 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5258 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5259 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5260 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5261
5262 @node Float
5263 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5264
5265 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5266 @cindex @code{float} directive
5267 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5268 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5269 @ifset GENERIC
5270 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5271 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5272 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5273 @end ifset
5274 @ifclear GENERIC
5275 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5276 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5277 in @sc{ieee} format.
5278 @end ifset
5279 @end ifclear
5280
5281 @node Func
5282 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5283 @cindex @code{func} directive
5284 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5285 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5286 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5287 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5288 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5289 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5290 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5291 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5292
5293 @node Global
5294 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5295
5296 @cindex @code{global} directive
5297 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5298 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5299 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5300 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5301 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5302 from another file linked into the same program.
5303
5304 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5305 compatibility with other assemblers.
5306
5307 @ifset HPPA
5308 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5309 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5310 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5311 @end ifset
5312
5313 @ifset ELF
5314 @node Gnu_attribute
5315 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5316 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5317
5318 @node Hidden
5319 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5320
5321 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5322 @cindex visibility
5323 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5324 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5325 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5326
5327 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5328 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5329 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5330 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5331 @end ifset
5332
5333 @node hword
5334 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5335
5336 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5337 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5338 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5339 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5340 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5341 a 16 bit number for each.
5342
5343 @ifset GENERIC
5344 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5345 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5346 @end ifset
5347 @ifclear GENERIC
5348 @ifset W32
5349 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5350 @end ifset
5351 @ifset W16
5352 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5353 @end ifset
5354 @end ifclear
5355
5356 @node Ident
5357 @section @code{.ident}
5358
5359 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5360
5361 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5362 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5363 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5364 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5365 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5366 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5367 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5368
5369 @node If
5370 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5371
5372 @cindex conditional assembly
5373 @cindex @code{if} directive
5374 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5375 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5376 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5377 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5378 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5379 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5380 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5381 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5382
5383 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5384 @table @code
5385 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5386 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5387 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5388 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5389 is considered to be undefined.
5390
5391 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5392 @item .ifb @var{text}
5393 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5394
5395 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5396 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5397 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5398 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5399 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5400 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5401 string comparison is case sensitive.
5402
5403 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5404 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5405 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5406
5407 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5408 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5409 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5410
5411 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5412 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5413 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5414 equal to zero.
5415
5416 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5417 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5418 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5419
5420 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5421 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5422 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5423 to zero.
5424
5425 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5426 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5427 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5428
5429 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5430 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5431 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5432 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5433
5434 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5435 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5436 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5437 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5438
5439 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5440 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5441 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5442 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5443 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5444 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5445 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5446
5447 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5448 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5449 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5450 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5451
5452 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5453 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5454 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5455 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5456 @end table
5457
5458 @node Incbin
5459 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5460
5461 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5462 @cindex binary files, including
5463 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5464 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5465 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5466 around @var{file}.
5467
5468 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5469 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5470 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5471 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5472 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5473
5474 @node Include
5475 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5476
5477 @cindex @code{include} directive
5478 @cindex supporting files, including
5479 @cindex files, including
5480 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5481 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5482 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5483 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5484 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5485 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5486 around @var{file}.
5487
5488 @node Int
5489 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5490
5491 @cindex @code{int} directive
5492 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5493 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5494 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5495 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5496 of target the assembly is for.
5497
5498 @ifclear GENERIC
5499 @ifset H8
5500 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5501 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5502 32-bit integers.
5503 @end ifset
5504 @end ifclear
5505
5506 @ifset ELF
5507 @node Internal
5508 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5509
5510 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5511 @cindex visibility
5512 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5513 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5514 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5515
5516 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5517 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5518 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5519 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5520 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5521 @end ifset
5522
5523 @node Irp
5524 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5525
5526 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5527 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5528 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5529 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5530 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5531 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5532 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5533 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5534
5535 For example, assembling
5536
5537 @example
5538 .irp param,1,2,3
5539 move d\param,sp@@-
5540 .endr
5541 @end example
5542
5543 is equivalent to assembling
5544
5545 @example
5546 move d1,sp@@-
5547 move d2,sp@@-
5548 move d3,sp@@-
5549 @end example
5550
5551 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5552
5553 @node Irpc
5554 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5555
5556 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5557 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5558 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5559 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5560 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5561 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5562 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5563 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5564
5565 For example, assembling
5566
5567 @example
5568 .irpc param,123
5569 move d\param,sp@@-
5570 .endr
5571 @end example
5572
5573 is equivalent to assembling
5574
5575 @example
5576 move d1,sp@@-
5577 move d2,sp@@-
5578 move d3,sp@@-
5579 @end example
5580
5581 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5582 at @xref{Macro}.
5583
5584 @node Lcomm
5585 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5586
5587 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5588 @cindex local common symbols
5589 @cindex symbols, local common
5590 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5591 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5592 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5593 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5594 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5595 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5596
5597 @ifset GENERIC
5598 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5599 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5600 @end ifset
5601
5602 @ifset HPPA
5603 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5604 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5605 @end ifset
5606
5607 @node Lflags
5608 @section @code{.lflags}
5609
5610 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5611 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5612 assemblers, but ignores it.
5613
5614 @ifclear no-line-dir
5615 @node Line
5616 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5617
5618 @cindex @code{line} directive
5619 @cindex logical line number
5620 @ifset aout
5621 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5622 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5623 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5624 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5625 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5626 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5627 @end ifset
5628
5629 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5630 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5631 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5632 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5633 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5634
5635 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5636 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5637 debugging.
5638 @end ifclear
5639
5640 @node Linkonce
5641 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5642 @cindex COMDAT
5643 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5644 @cindex common sections
5645 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5646 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5647 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5648 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5649 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5650 unique.
5651
5652 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5653 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5654 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5655
5656 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5657 following strings. For example:
5658 @smallexample
5659 .linkonce same_size
5660 @end smallexample
5661 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5662
5663 @table @code
5664 @item discard
5665 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5666
5667 @item one_only
5668 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5669
5670 @item same_size
5671 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5672
5673 @item same_contents
5674 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5675 @end table
5676
5677 @node List
5678 @section @code{.list}
5679
5680 @cindex @code{list} directive
5681 @cindex listing control, turning on
5682 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5683 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5684 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5685 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5686 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5687
5688 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5689 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5690 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5691
5692 @node Ln
5693 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5694
5695 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5696 @ifclear no-line-dir
5697 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5698 @end ifclear
5699 @ifset no-line-dir
5700 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5701 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5702 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5703 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5704 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5705 @end ifset
5706
5707 @node Loc
5708 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5709 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5710 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5711 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5712 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5713 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5714 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5715 the row is added.
5716
5717 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5718
5719 @table @code
5720 @item basic_block
5721 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5722 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5723
5724 @item prologue_end
5725 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5726 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5727
5728 @item epilogue_begin
5729 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5730 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5731
5732 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5733 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5734 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5735 either 0 or 1.
5736
5737 @item isa @var{value}
5738 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5739 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5740
5741 @item discriminator @var{value}
5742 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5743 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5744
5745 @item view @var{value}
5746 This option causes a row to be added to @code{.debug_line} in reference to the
5747 current address (which might not be the same as that of the following assembly
5748 instruction), and to associate @var{value} with the @code{view} register in the
5749 @code{.debug_line} state machine. If @var{value} is a label, both the
5750 @code{view} register and the label are set to the number of prior @code{.loc}
5751 directives at the same program location. If @var{value} is the literal
5752 @code{0}, the @code{view} register is set to zero, and the assembler asserts
5753 that there aren't any prior @code{.loc} directives at the same program
5754 location. If @var{value} is the literal @code{-0}, the assembler arrange for
5755 the @code{view} register to be reset in this row, even if there are prior
5756 @code{.loc} directives at the same program location.
5757
5758 @end table
5759
5760 @node Loc_mark_labels
5761 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5762 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5763 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5764 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5765 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5766 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5767 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5768 this function respectively.
5769
5770 @ifset ELF
5771 @node Local
5772 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5773
5774 @cindex @code{local} directive
5775 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5776 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5777 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5778 they will be created.
5779
5780 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5781 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5782 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5783 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5784 @end ifset
5785
5786 @node Long
5787 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5788
5789 @cindex @code{long} directive
5790 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5791
5792 @ignore
5793 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5794 @c what it really ought to do
5795 @node Lsym
5796 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5797
5798 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5799 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5800 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5801 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5802 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5803 the same as the expression value:
5804 @smallexample
5805 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5806 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5807 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5808 @end smallexample
5809 @noindent
5810 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5811 @end ignore
5812
5813 @node Macro
5814 @section @code{.macro}
5815
5816 @cindex macros
5817 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5818 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5819 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5820
5821 @example
5822 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5823 .long \from
5824 .if \to-\from
5825 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5826 .endif
5827 .endm
5828 @end example
5829
5830 @noindent
5831 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5832
5833 @example
5834 .long 0
5835 .long 1
5836 .long 2
5837 .long 3
5838 .long 4
5839 .long 5
5840 @end example
5841
5842 @ftable @code
5843 @item .macro @var{macname}
5844 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5845 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5846 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5847 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5848 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5849 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5850 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5851 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5852 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5853 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5854 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5855 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5856
5857 @table @code
5858 @item .macro comm
5859 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5860 arguments.
5861
5862 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5863 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5864 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5865 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5866 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5867
5868 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5869 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5870 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5871 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5872 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5873 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5874 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5875 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5876
5877 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5878 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5879 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5880 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5881 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5882
5883 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5884 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5885 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5886
5887 @end table
5888
5889 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5890 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5891 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5892 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5893 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5894 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5895 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5896 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5897 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5898 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5899 this macro definition:
5900
5901 @example
5902 .macro label l
5903 \l:
5904 .endm
5905 @end example
5906
5907 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5908 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5909 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5910 identifier.
5911
5912 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5913 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5914 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5915 length specifier like this:
5916
5917 @example
5918 .macro opcode base length
5919 \base.\length
5920 .endm
5921 @end example
5922
5923 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5924 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5925 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5926
5927 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5928
5929 @table @code
5930 @item Insert white space
5931 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5932 solution. eg:
5933
5934 @example
5935 .macro label l
5936 \l :
5937 .endm
5938 @end example
5939
5940 @item Use @samp{\()}
5941 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5942 the following text. eg:
5943
5944 @example
5945 .macro opcode base length
5946 \base\().\length
5947 .endm
5948 @end example
5949
5950 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5951 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5952 used as a separator. eg:
5953
5954 @example
5955 .altmacro
5956 .macro label l
5957 l&:
5958 .endm
5959 @end example
5960 @end table
5961
5962 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5963 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5964 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5965
5966 @item .endm
5967 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5968 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5969
5970 @item .exitm
5971 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5972 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5973
5974 @cindex number of macros executed
5975 @cindex macros, count executed
5976 @item \@@
5977 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5978 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5979 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5980
5981 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5982 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5983 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5984 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5985 @end ftable
5986
5987 @node MRI
5988 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5989
5990 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5991 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5992 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5993 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5994 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5995 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5996
5997 @node Noaltmacro
5998 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5999 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
6000
6001 @node Nolist
6002 @section @code{.nolist}
6003
6004 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
6005 @cindex listing control, turning off
6006 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6007 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6008 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6009 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6010 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6011
6012 @node Nops
6013 @section @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
6014
6015 @cindex @code{nops} directive
6016 @cindex filling memory with no-op instructions
6017 This directive emits @var{size} bytes filled with no-op instructions.
6018 @var{size} is absolute expression, which must be a positve value.
6019 @var{control} controls how no-op instructions should be generated. If
6020 the comma and @var{control} are omitted, @var{control} is assumed to be
6021 zero.
6022
6023 Note: For Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 targets, @var{control} specifies
6024 the size limit of a no-op instruction. The valid values of @var{control}
6025 are between 0 and 4 in 16-bit mode, between 0 and 7 when tuning for
6026 older processors in 32-bit mode, between 0 and 11 in 64-bit mode or when
6027 tuning for newer processors in 32-bit mode. When 0 is used, the no-op
6028 instruction size limit is set to the maximum supported size.
6029
6030 @node Octa
6031 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6032
6033 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on some? Or warn?
6034 @cindex @code{octa} directive
6035 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6036 @cindex sixteen byte integer
6037 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6038 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6039
6040 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6041 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6042
6043 @node Offset
6044 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6045
6046 @cindex @code{offset} directive
6047 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6048 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6049 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6050 directive.
6051
6052 @node Org
6053 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6054
6055 @cindex @code{org} directive
6056 @cindex location counter, advancing
6057 @cindex advancing location counter
6058 @cindex current address, advancing
6059 Advance the location counter of the current section to
6060 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6061 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6062 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6063 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6064 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6065 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6066 is the same as the current subsection.
6067
6068 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6069 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6070 backwards.
6071
6072 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6073 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6074 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6075 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6076 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6077 a chance to share your improved assembler.
6078
6079 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6080 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6081 people's assemblers.
6082
6083 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6084 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6085 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6086 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
6087
6088 @node P2align
6089 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
6090
6091 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6092 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
6093 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6094 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6095 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6096 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6097 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6098 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
6099
6100 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6101 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6102 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
6103 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6104 with no-op instructions.
6105
6106 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6107 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6108 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6109 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6110 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6111 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6112 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6113
6114 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6115 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6116 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6117 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6118 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6119 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6120 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6121 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6122 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6123 undefined.
6124
6125 @ifset ELF
6126 @node PopSection
6127 @section @code{.popsection}
6128
6129 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6130 @cindex Section Stack
6131 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6132 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6133 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6134 (@pxref{Previous}).
6135
6136 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6137 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6138 stack.
6139 @end ifset
6140
6141 @ifset ELF
6142 @node Previous
6143 @section @code{.previous}
6144
6145 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6146 @cindex Section Stack
6147 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6148 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6149 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6150 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6151
6152 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6153 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6154 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6155 subsections). For example:
6156
6157 @smallexample
6158 .section A
6159 .subsection 1
6160 .word 0x1234
6161 .subsection 2
6162 .word 0x5678
6163 .previous
6164 .word 0x9abc
6165 @end smallexample
6166
6167 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6168 section A. Whilst:
6169
6170 @smallexample
6171 .section A
6172 .subsection 1
6173 # Now in section A subsection 1
6174 .word 0x1234
6175 .section B
6176 .subsection 0
6177 # Now in section B subsection 0
6178 .word 0x5678
6179 .subsection 1
6180 # Now in section B subsection 1
6181 .word 0x9abc
6182 .previous
6183 # Now in section B subsection 0
6184 .word 0xdef0
6185 @end smallexample
6186
6187 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6188 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6189
6190 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6191 the top section on the section stack.
6192 @end ifset
6193
6194 @node Print
6195 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6196
6197 @cindex @code{print} directive
6198 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6199 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6200
6201 @ifset ELF
6202 @node Protected
6203 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6204
6205 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6206 @cindex visibility
6207 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6208 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6209
6210 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6211 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6212 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6213 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6214 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6215 this.
6216 @end ifset
6217
6218 @node Psize
6219 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6220
6221 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6222 @cindex listing control: paper size
6223 @cindex paper size, for listings
6224 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6225 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6226
6227 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6228 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6229 default width is 200 columns.
6230
6231 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6232 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6233 @code{.eject}).
6234
6235 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6236 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6237
6238 @node Purgem
6239 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6240
6241 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6242 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6243 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6244
6245 @ifset ELF
6246 @node PushSection
6247 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6248
6249 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6250 @cindex Section Stack
6251 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6252 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6253 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6254 (@pxref{Previous}).
6255
6256 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6257 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6258 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6259 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6260 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6261 @end ifset
6262
6263 @node Quad
6264 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6265
6266 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6267 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6268 each bignum, it emits
6269 @ifclear bignum-16
6270 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6271 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6272 @cindex eight-byte integer
6273 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6274
6275 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6276 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6277 @end ifclear
6278 @ifset bignum-16
6279 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6280 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6281 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6282 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6283 @end ifset
6284
6285 @node Reloc
6286 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6287
6288 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6289 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6290 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6291 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6292 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6293 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6294 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6295 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6296 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6297 section.
6298
6299 @node Rept
6300 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6301
6302 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6303 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6304 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6305
6306 For example, assembling
6307
6308 @example
6309 .rept 3
6310 .long 0
6311 .endr
6312 @end example
6313
6314 is equivalent to assembling
6315
6316 @example
6317 .long 0
6318 .long 0
6319 .long 0
6320 @end example
6321
6322 A count of zero is allowed, but nothing is generated. Negative counts are not
6323 allowed and if encountered will be treated as if they were zero.
6324
6325 @node Sbttl
6326 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6327
6328 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6329 @cindex subtitles for listings
6330 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6331 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6332 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6333
6334 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6335 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6336
6337 @ifset COFF
6338 @node Scl
6339 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6340
6341 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6342 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6343 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6344 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6345 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6346 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6347 symbolic debugging information.
6348 @end ifset
6349
6350 @ifset COFF-ELF
6351 @node Section
6352 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6353
6354 @cindex named section
6355 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6356 named @var{name}.
6357
6358 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6359 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6360 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6361
6362 @ifset COFF
6363 @ifset ELF
6364 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6365 @subheading COFF Version
6366 @end ifset
6367
6368 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6369 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6370 ways:
6371
6372 @smallexample
6373 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6374 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6375 @end smallexample
6376
6377 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6378 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6379
6380 @table @code
6381 @item b
6382 bss section (uninitialized data)
6383 @item n
6384 section is not loaded
6385 @item w
6386 writable section
6387 @item d
6388 data section
6389 @item e
6390 exclude section from linking
6391 @item r
6392 read-only section
6393 @item x
6394 executable section
6395 @item s
6396 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6397 @item a
6398 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6399 @item y
6400 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6401 @item 0-9
6402 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6403 @end table
6404
6405 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6406 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6407 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6408 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6409 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6410
6411 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6412 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6413 @end ifset
6414
6415 @ifset ELF
6416 @ifset COFF
6417 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6418 @subheading ELF Version
6419 @end ifset
6420
6421 @cindex Section Stack
6422 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6423 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6424 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6425 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6426
6427 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6428 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6429
6430 @smallexample
6431 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6432 @end smallexample
6433
6434 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6435 @kindex --sectname-subst
6436 @cindex section name substitution
6437 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6438 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6439 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6440
6441 @smallexample
6442 .macro exception_code
6443 .section %S.exception
6444 [exception code here]
6445 .previous
6446 .endm
6447
6448 .text
6449 [code]
6450 exception_code
6451 [...]
6452
6453 .section .init
6454 [init code]
6455 exception_code
6456 [...]
6457 @end smallexample
6458
6459 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6460 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6461 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between ancillary sections that are
6462 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from ancillary sections that
6463 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6464 macros just for that purpose.
6465
6466 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6467 combination of the following characters:
6468
6469 @table @code
6470 @item a
6471 section is allocatable
6472 @item d
6473 section is a GNU_MBIND section
6474 @item e
6475 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6476 @item w
6477 section is writable
6478 @item x
6479 section is executable
6480 @item M
6481 section is mergeable
6482 @item S
6483 section contains zero terminated strings
6484 @item G
6485 section is a member of a section group
6486 @item T
6487 section is used for thread-local-storage
6488 @item ?
6489 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6490 @item @code{<number>}
6491 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6492 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6493 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6494 resulting value.
6495 @item @code{<target specific>}
6496 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6497 @end table
6498
6499 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6500 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6501 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6502 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6503 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6504 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6505
6506 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6507
6508 @table @code
6509 @item @@progbits
6510 section contains data
6511 @item @@nobits
6512 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6513 @item @@note
6514 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6515 @item @@init_array
6516 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6517 @item @@fini_array
6518 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6519 @item @@preinit_array
6520 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6521 @item @@@code{<number>}
6522 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6523 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
6524 some targets extend this list with their own types
6525 @end table
6526
6527 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6528 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6529
6530 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6531 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6532 @code{%} character.
6533
6534 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6535 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6536 type will generate an error from the assembler.
6537
6538 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6539 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6540
6541 @smallexample
6542 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6543 @end smallexample
6544
6545 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6546 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6547 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6548 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6549 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6550 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6551 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6552 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6553 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6554
6555 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6556 be present along with an additional field like this:
6557
6558 @smallexample
6559 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6560 @end smallexample
6561
6562 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6563 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6564
6565 @table @code
6566 @item comdat
6567 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6568 @item .gnu.linkonce
6569 an alias for comdat
6570 @end table
6571
6572 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6573 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6574
6575 @smallexample
6576 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6577 @end smallexample
6578
6579 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6580 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6581 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6582 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6583 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6584 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6585
6586 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6587 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6588 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6589 executable. The section will contain data.
6590
6591 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6592 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6593
6594 @smallexample
6595 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6596 @end smallexample
6597
6598 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6599 separated flags:
6600
6601 @table @code
6602 @item #alloc
6603 section is allocatable
6604 @item #write
6605 section is writable
6606 @item #execinstr
6607 section is executable
6608 @item #exclude
6609 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6610 @item #tls
6611 section is used for thread local storage
6612 @end table
6613
6614 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6615 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6616 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6617 work.
6618 @end ifset
6619 @end ifset
6620
6621 @node Set
6622 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6623
6624 @cindex @code{set} directive
6625 @cindex symbol value, setting
6626 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6627 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6628 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6629 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6630
6631 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6632 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6633 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6634 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6635 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6636 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6637 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6638 different symbols.
6639
6640 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6641 file is the last value stored into it.
6642
6643 @ifset Z80
6644 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6645 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6646 @end ifset
6647
6648 @node Short
6649 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6650
6651 @cindex @code{short} directive
6652 @ifset GENERIC
6653 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6654 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6655
6656 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6657 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6658 @end ifset
6659 @ifclear GENERIC
6660 @ifset W16
6661 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6662 @end ifset
6663 @ifset W32
6664 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6665 a 16 bit number for each.
6666 @end ifset
6667 @end ifclear
6668
6669 @node Single
6670 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6671
6672 @cindex @code{single} directive
6673 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6674 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6675 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6676 @ifset GENERIC
6677 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6678 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6679 @end ifset
6680 @ifclear GENERIC
6681 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6682 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6683 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6684 @end ifset
6685 @end ifclear
6686
6687 @ifset COFF-ELF
6688 @node Size
6689 @section @code{.size}
6690
6691 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6692
6693 @ifset COFF
6694 @ifset ELF
6695 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6696 @subheading COFF Version
6697 @end ifset
6698
6699 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6700 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6701 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6702
6703 @smallexample
6704 .size @var{expression}
6705 @end smallexample
6706
6707 @end ifset
6708
6709 @ifset ELF
6710 @ifset COFF
6711 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6712 @subheading ELF Version
6713 @end ifset
6714
6715 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6716 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6717
6718 @smallexample
6719 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6720 @end smallexample
6721
6722 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6723 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6724 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6725 symbols.
6726 @end ifset
6727 @end ifset
6728
6729 @ifclear no-space-dir
6730 @node Skip
6731 @section @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
6732
6733 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6734 @cindex filling memory
6735 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6736 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6737 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6738 @samp{.space}.
6739 @end ifclear
6740
6741 @node Sleb128
6742 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6743
6744 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6745 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6746 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6747 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6748
6749 @ifclear no-space-dir
6750 @node Space
6751 @section @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
6752
6753 @cindex @code{space} directive
6754 @cindex filling memory
6755 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6756 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6757 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6758 as @samp{.skip}.
6759
6760 @ifset HPPA
6761 @quotation
6762 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6763 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6764 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6765 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6766 for a summary.
6767 @end quotation
6768 @end ifset
6769 @end ifclear
6770
6771 @ifset have-stabs
6772 @node Stab
6773 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6774
6775 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6776 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6777 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6778 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6779 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6780 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6781 Up to five fields are required:
6782
6783 @table @var
6784 @item string
6785 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6786 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6787 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6788 using this field.
6789
6790 @item type
6791 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6792 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6793 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6794
6795 @item other
6796 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6797 low 8 bits of this expression.
6798
6799 @item desc
6800 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6801 bits of this expression.
6802
6803 @item value
6804 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6805 @end table
6806
6807 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6808 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6809 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6810 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6811
6812 @table @code
6813 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6814 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6815
6816 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6817 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6818 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6819 strings.
6820
6821 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6822 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6823 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6824 assembled.
6825
6826 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6827 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6828 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6829
6830 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6831 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6832 All five fields are specified.
6833 @end table
6834 @end ifset
6835 @c end have-stabs
6836
6837 @node String
6838 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6839 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6840
6841 @cindex string, copying to object file
6842 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6843 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6844 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6845 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6846 @cindex @code{string} directive
6847 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6848 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6849 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6850 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6851
6852 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6853 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6854 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6855 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6856
6857 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6858 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6859 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6860 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6861
6862 Example:
6863 @smallexample
6864 .string32 "BYE"
6865 expands to:
6866 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6867 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6868 @end smallexample
6869
6870
6871 @node Struct
6872 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6873
6874 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6875 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6876 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6877 @smallexample
6878 .struct 0
6879 field1:
6880 .struct field1 + 4
6881 field2:
6882 .struct field2 + 4
6883 field3:
6884 @end smallexample
6885 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6886 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6887 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6888 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6889 before further assembly.
6890
6891 @ifset ELF
6892 @node SubSection
6893 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6894
6895 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6896 @cindex Section Stack
6897 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6898 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6899 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6900 (@pxref{Previous}).
6901
6902 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6903 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6904 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6905 @end ifset
6906
6907 @ifset ELF
6908 @node Symver
6909 @section @code{.symver}
6910 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6911 @cindex symbol versioning
6912 @cindex versions of symbols
6913 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6914 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6915 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6916 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6917 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6918 shared library.
6919
6920 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6921 @smallexample
6922 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6923 @end smallexample
6924 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6925 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6926 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6927 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6928 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6929 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6930 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6931 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6932 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6933 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6934 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6935 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6936 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6937 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6938
6939 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6940 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6941 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6942 symbol table.
6943
6944 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6945 @smallexample
6946 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6947 @end smallexample
6948 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6949 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6950 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6951 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6952
6953 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6954 @smallexample
6955 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6956 @end smallexample
6957 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6958 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6959 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6960 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6961 @end ifset
6962
6963 @ifset COFF
6964 @node Tag
6965 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6966
6967 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6968 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6969 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6970 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6971 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6972 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6973 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6974 @end ifset
6975
6976 @node Text
6977 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6978
6979 @cindex @code{text} directive
6980 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6981 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6982 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6983 is used.
6984
6985 @node Title
6986 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6987
6988 @cindex @code{title} directive
6989 @cindex listing control: title line
6990 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6991 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6992
6993 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6994 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6995
6996 @ifset COFF-ELF
6997 @node Type
6998 @section @code{.type}
6999
7000 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
7001
7002 @ifset COFF
7003 @ifset ELF
7004 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7005 @subheading COFF Version
7006 @end ifset
7007
7008 @cindex COFF symbol type
7009 @cindex symbol type, COFF
7010 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7011 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7012 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7013
7014 @smallexample
7015 .type @var{int}
7016 @end smallexample
7017
7018 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7019 entry.
7020
7021 @end ifset
7022
7023 @ifset ELF
7024 @ifset COFF
7025 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7026 @subheading ELF Version
7027 @end ifset
7028
7029 @cindex ELF symbol type
7030 @cindex symbol type, ELF
7031 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7032 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7033
7034 @smallexample
7035 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7036 @end smallexample
7037
7038 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7039 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7040 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7041 compatibility with various other assemblers.
7042
7043 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7044 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7045 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7046 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7047 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7048 assemblers.
7049
7050 The syntaxes supported are:
7051
7052 @smallexample
7053 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7054 .type <name>,#<type>
7055 .type <name>,@@<type>
7056 .type <name>,%<type>
7057 .type <name>,"<type>"
7058 @end smallexample
7059
7060 The types supported are:
7061
7062 @table @gcctabopt
7063 @item STT_FUNC
7064 @itemx function
7065 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7066
7067 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7068 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
7069 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7070 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7071
7072 @item STT_OBJECT
7073 @itemx object
7074 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7075
7076 @item STT_TLS
7077 @itemx tls_object
7078 Mark the symbol as being a thread-local data object.
7079
7080 @item STT_COMMON
7081 @itemx common
7082 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7083
7084 @item STT_NOTYPE
7085 @itemx notype
7086 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7087
7088 @item gnu_unique_object
7089 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7090 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7091 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7092 systems).
7093
7094 @end table
7095
7096 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7097
7098 @end ifset
7099 @end ifset
7100
7101 @node Uleb128
7102 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7103
7104 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7105 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7106 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7107 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7108
7109 @ifset COFF
7110 @node Val
7111 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7112
7113 @cindex @code{val} directive
7114 @cindex COFF value attribute
7115 @cindex value attribute, COFF
7116 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7117 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7118 entry.
7119 @end ifset
7120
7121 @ifset ELF
7122 @node Version
7123 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7124
7125 @cindex @code{version} directive
7126 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7127 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7128 @end ifset
7129
7130 @ifset ELF
7131 @node VTableEntry
7132 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7133
7134 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7135 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7136 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7137
7138 @node VTableInherit
7139 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7140
7141 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7142 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7143 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7144 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7145 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7146 @end ifset
7147
7148 @node Warning
7149 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7150 @cindex warning directive
7151 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7152 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7153
7154 @node Weak
7155 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7156
7157 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7158 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7159 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7160
7161 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7162 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7163 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7164
7165 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7166 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7167 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7168
7169 @node Weakref
7170 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7171
7172 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7173 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7174 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7175 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7176 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7177 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7178
7179 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7180 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7181 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7182 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7183 had the references to the alias removed.
7184
7185 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7186 within the assembler.
7187
7188 @node Word
7189 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7190
7191 @cindex @code{word} directive
7192 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7193 separated by commas.
7194 @ifclear GENERIC
7195 @ifset W32
7196 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7197 @end ifset
7198 @ifset W16
7199 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7200 @end ifset
7201 @end ifclear
7202 @ifset GENERIC
7203
7204 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7205 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7206 @end ifset
7207
7208 @c on sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7209 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7210 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7211 @cindex difference tables altered
7212 @cindex altered difference tables
7213 @quotation
7214 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7215 @end quotation
7216
7217 @ifset GENERIC
7218 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7219 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7220 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7221 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7222
7223 @end ifset
7224 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7225 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7226 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7227 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7228 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7229 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7230 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7231 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7232 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7233 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7234 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7235 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7236 @code{sym2}.
7237
7238 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7239 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7240 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7241 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7242 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7243 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7244 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7245
7246 @ifset INTERNALS
7247 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7248 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7249 assembly language programmers.
7250 @end ifset
7251 @end ifset
7252 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7253
7254 @ifclear no-space-dir
7255 @node Zero
7256 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7257
7258 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7259 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7260 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7261 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7262 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7263 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7264 @end ifclear
7265
7266 @ifset ELF
7267 @node 2byte
7268 @section @code{.2byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7269 @cindex @code{2byte} directive
7270 @cindex two-byte integer
7271 @cindex integer, 2-byte
7272
7273 This directive expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas. If there
7274 are no expressions then the directive does nothing. Otherwise each expression
7275 is evaluated in turn and placed in the next two bytes of the current output
7276 section, using the endian model of the target. If an expression will not fit
7277 in two bytes, a warning message is displayed and the least significant two
7278 bytes of the expression's value are used. If an expression cannot be evaluated
7279 at assembly time then relocations will be generated in order to compute the
7280 value at link time.
7281
7282 This directive does not apply any alignment before or after inserting the
7283 values. As a result of this, if relocations are generated, they may be
7284 different from those used for inserting values with a guaranteed alignment.
7285
7286 This directive is only available for ELF targets,
7287
7288 @node 4byte
7289 @section @code{.4byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7290 @cindex @code{4byte} directive
7291 @cindex four-byte integer
7292 @cindex integer, 4-byte
7293
7294 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, four byte
7295 long values into the output.
7296
7297 @node 8byte
7298 @section @code{.8byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7299 @cindex @code{8byte} directive
7300 @cindex eight-byte integer
7301 @cindex integer, 8-byte
7302
7303 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, eight
7304 byte long bignum values into the output.
7305
7306 @end ifset
7307
7308 @node Deprecated
7309 @section Deprecated Directives
7310
7311 @cindex deprecated directives
7312 @cindex obsolescent directives
7313 One day these directives won't work.
7314 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7315 @table @t
7316 @item .abort
7317 @item .line
7318 @end table
7319
7320 @ifset ELF
7321 @node Object Attributes
7322 @chapter Object Attributes
7323 @cindex object attributes
7324
7325 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7326 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7327 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7328 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7329 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7330 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7331 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7332 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7333 newer generation at run-time.
7334
7335 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7336 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7337 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7338 correctly.
7339
7340 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7341 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7342 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7343 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7344 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7345 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7346
7347 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7348 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7349
7350 @menu
7351 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7352 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7353 @end menu
7354
7355 @node GNU Object Attributes
7356 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7357
7358 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7359 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7360
7361 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7362 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7363 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7364 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7365 architecture-dependent ones.
7366
7367 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7368
7369 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7370
7371 @table @r
7372 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7373 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7374 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7375 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7376 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7377 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7378 @end table
7379
7380 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7381
7382 @table @r
7383 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7384 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7385
7386 @itemize @bullet
7387 @item
7388 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7389 @item
7390 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7391 double-precision FPU.
7392 @item
7393 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7394 @item
7395 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7396 @item
7397 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7398 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7399 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7400 @item
7401 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7402 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7403 general-purpose registers.
7404 @item
7405 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7406 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7407 @item
7408 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7409 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7410 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7411 @end itemize
7412 @end table
7413
7414 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7415
7416 @table @r
7417 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7418 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7419
7420 @itemize @bullet
7421 @item
7422 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7423 @item
7424 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7425 @item
7426 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7427 @item
7428 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7429 @end itemize
7430
7431 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7432 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7433
7434 @itemize @bullet
7435 @item
7436 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7437 @item
7438 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7439 @item
7440 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7441 @item
7442 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7443 @end itemize
7444 @end table
7445
7446 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7447
7448 @table @r
7449 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7450 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7451
7452 @itemize @bullet
7453 @item
7454 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7455 @item
7456 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7457 @item
7458 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7459 @end itemize
7460 @end table
7461
7462 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7463 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7464
7465 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7466 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7467 mailing list.
7468
7469 @itemize @bullet
7470 @item
7471 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7472 @item
7473 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7474 @item
7475 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7476 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7477 @item
7478 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7479 @item
7480 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7481 @item
7482 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7483 @end itemize
7484
7485 @end ifset
7486
7487 @ifset GENERIC
7488 @node Machine Dependencies
7489 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7490
7491 @cindex machine dependencies
7492 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7493 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7494 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7495 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7496 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7497 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7498 optimization.
7499
7500 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7501 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7502 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7503
7504 @menu
7505 @ifset AARCH64
7506 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7507 @end ifset
7508 @ifset ALPHA
7509 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7510 @end ifset
7511 @ifset ARC
7512 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7513 @end ifset
7514 @ifset ARM
7515 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7516 @end ifset
7517 @ifset AVR
7518 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7519 @end ifset
7520 @ifset Blackfin
7521 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7522 @end ifset
7523 @ifset CR16
7524 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7525 @end ifset
7526 @ifset CRIS
7527 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7528 @end ifset
7529 @ifset D10V
7530 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7531 @end ifset
7532 @ifset D30V
7533 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7534 @end ifset
7535 @ifset EPIPHANY
7536 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7537 @end ifset
7538 @ifset H8/300
7539 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7540 @end ifset
7541 @ifset HPPA
7542 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7543 @end ifset
7544 @ifset I80386
7545 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7546 @end ifset
7547 @ifset IA64
7548 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7549 @end ifset
7550 @ifset IP2K
7551 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7552 @end ifset
7553 @ifset LM32
7554 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7555 @end ifset
7556 @ifset M32C
7557 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7558 @end ifset
7559 @ifset M32R
7560 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7561 @end ifset
7562 @ifset M680X0
7563 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7564 @end ifset
7565 @ifset M68HC11
7566 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7567 @end ifset
7568 @ifset METAG
7569 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7570 @end ifset
7571 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7572 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7573 @end ifset
7574 @ifset MIPS
7575 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7576 @end ifset
7577 @ifset MMIX
7578 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7579 @end ifset
7580 @ifset MSP430
7581 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7582 @end ifset
7583 @ifset NDS32
7584 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7585 @end ifset
7586 @ifset NIOSII
7587 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7588 @end ifset
7589 @ifset NS32K
7590 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7591 @end ifset
7592 @ifset PDP11
7593 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7594 @end ifset
7595 @ifset PJ
7596 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7597 @end ifset
7598 @ifset PPC
7599 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7600 @end ifset
7601 @ifset PRU
7602 * PRU-Dependent:: PRU Dependent Features
7603 @end ifset
7604 @ifset RISCV
7605 * RISC-V-Dependent:: RISC-V Dependent Features
7606 @end ifset
7607 @ifset RL78
7608 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7609 @end ifset
7610 @ifset RX
7611 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7612 @end ifset
7613 @ifset S390
7614 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7615 @end ifset
7616 @ifset SCORE
7617 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7618 @end ifset
7619 @ifset SH
7620 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7621 @end ifset
7622 @ifset SPARC
7623 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7624 @end ifset
7625 @ifset TIC54X
7626 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7627 @end ifset
7628 @ifset TIC6X
7629 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7630 @end ifset
7631 @ifset TILEGX
7632 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7633 @end ifset
7634 @ifset TILEPRO
7635 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7636 @end ifset
7637 @ifset V850
7638 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7639 @end ifset
7640 @ifset VAX
7641 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7642 @end ifset
7643 @ifset VISIUM
7644 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7645 @end ifset
7646 @ifset WASM32
7647 * WebAssembly-Dependent:: WebAssembly Dependent Features
7648 @end ifset
7649 @ifset XGATE
7650 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Dependent Features
7651 @end ifset
7652 @ifset XSTORMY16
7653 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7654 @end ifset
7655 @ifset XTENSA
7656 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7657 @end ifset
7658 @ifset Z80
7659 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7660 @end ifset
7661 @ifset Z8000
7662 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7663 @end ifset
7664 @end menu
7665
7666 @lowersections
7667 @end ifset
7668
7669 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7670 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7671 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7672 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7673 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7674 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7675 @c in both conditional blocks.
7676
7677 @ifset AARCH64
7678 @include c-aarch64.texi
7679 @end ifset
7680
7681 @ifset ALPHA
7682 @include c-alpha.texi
7683 @end ifset
7684
7685 @ifset ARC
7686 @include c-arc.texi
7687 @end ifset
7688
7689 @ifset ARM
7690 @include c-arm.texi
7691 @end ifset
7692
7693 @ifset AVR
7694 @include c-avr.texi
7695 @end ifset
7696
7697 @ifset Blackfin
7698 @include c-bfin.texi
7699 @end ifset
7700
7701 @ifset CR16
7702 @include c-cr16.texi
7703 @end ifset
7704
7705 @ifset CRIS
7706 @include c-cris.texi
7707 @end ifset
7708
7709 @ifset Renesas-all
7710 @ifclear GENERIC
7711 @node Machine Dependencies
7712 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7713
7714 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7715 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7716 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7717 family.
7718
7719 @menu
7720 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7721 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7722 @end menu
7723 @lowersections
7724 @end ifclear
7725 @end ifset
7726
7727 @ifset D10V
7728 @include c-d10v.texi
7729 @end ifset
7730
7731 @ifset D30V
7732 @include c-d30v.texi
7733 @end ifset
7734
7735 @ifset EPIPHANY
7736 @include c-epiphany.texi
7737 @end ifset
7738
7739 @ifset H8/300
7740 @include c-h8300.texi
7741 @end ifset
7742
7743 @ifset HPPA
7744 @include c-hppa.texi
7745 @end ifset
7746
7747 @ifset I80386
7748 @include c-i386.texi
7749 @end ifset
7750
7751 @ifset IA64
7752 @include c-ia64.texi
7753 @end ifset
7754
7755 @ifset IP2K
7756 @include c-ip2k.texi
7757 @end ifset
7758
7759 @ifset LM32
7760 @include c-lm32.texi
7761 @end ifset
7762
7763 @ifset M32C
7764 @include c-m32c.texi
7765 @end ifset
7766
7767 @ifset M32R
7768 @include c-m32r.texi
7769 @end ifset
7770
7771 @ifset M680X0
7772 @include c-m68k.texi
7773 @end ifset
7774
7775 @ifset M68HC11
7776 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7777 @end ifset
7778
7779 @ifset METAG
7780 @include c-metag.texi
7781 @end ifset
7782
7783 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7784 @include c-microblaze.texi
7785 @end ifset
7786
7787 @ifset MIPS
7788 @include c-mips.texi
7789 @end ifset
7790
7791 @ifset MMIX
7792 @include c-mmix.texi
7793 @end ifset
7794
7795 @ifset MSP430
7796 @include c-msp430.texi
7797 @end ifset
7798
7799 @ifset NDS32
7800 @include c-nds32.texi
7801 @end ifset
7802
7803 @ifset NIOSII
7804 @include c-nios2.texi
7805 @end ifset
7806
7807 @ifset NS32K
7808 @include c-ns32k.texi
7809 @end ifset
7810
7811 @ifset PDP11
7812 @include c-pdp11.texi
7813 @end ifset
7814
7815 @ifset PJ
7816 @include c-pj.texi
7817 @end ifset
7818
7819 @ifset PPC
7820 @include c-ppc.texi
7821 @end ifset
7822
7823 @ifset PRU
7824 @include c-pru.texi
7825 @end ifset
7826
7827 @ifset RISCV
7828 @include c-riscv.texi
7829 @end ifset
7830
7831 @ifset RL78
7832 @include c-rl78.texi
7833 @end ifset
7834
7835 @ifset RX
7836 @include c-rx.texi
7837 @end ifset
7838
7839 @ifset S390
7840 @include c-s390.texi
7841 @end ifset
7842
7843 @ifset SCORE
7844 @include c-score.texi
7845 @end ifset
7846
7847 @ifset SH
7848 @include c-sh.texi
7849 @end ifset
7850
7851 @ifset SPARC
7852 @include c-sparc.texi
7853 @end ifset
7854
7855 @ifset TIC54X
7856 @include c-tic54x.texi
7857 @end ifset
7858
7859 @ifset TIC6X
7860 @include c-tic6x.texi
7861 @end ifset
7862
7863 @ifset TILEGX
7864 @include c-tilegx.texi
7865 @end ifset
7866
7867 @ifset TILEPRO
7868 @include c-tilepro.texi
7869 @end ifset
7870
7871 @ifset V850
7872 @include c-v850.texi
7873 @end ifset
7874
7875 @ifset VAX
7876 @include c-vax.texi
7877 @end ifset
7878
7879 @ifset VISIUM
7880 @include c-visium.texi
7881 @end ifset
7882
7883 @ifset WASM32
7884 @include c-wasm32.texi
7885 @end ifset
7886
7887 @ifset XGATE
7888 @include c-xgate.texi
7889 @end ifset
7890
7891 @ifset XSTORMY16
7892 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7893 @end ifset
7894
7895 @ifset XTENSA
7896 @include c-xtensa.texi
7897 @end ifset
7898
7899 @ifset Z80
7900 @include c-z80.texi
7901 @end ifset
7902
7903 @ifset Z8000
7904 @include c-z8k.texi
7905 @end ifset
7906
7907 @ifset GENERIC
7908 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7909 @raisesections
7910 @end ifset
7911
7912 @node Reporting Bugs
7913 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7914 @cindex bugs in assembler
7915 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7916
7917 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7918
7919 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7920 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7921 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7922 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7923
7924 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7925 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7926
7927 @menu
7928 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7929 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7930 @end menu
7931
7932 @node Bug Criteria
7933 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7934 @cindex bug criteria
7935
7936 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7937
7938 @itemize @bullet
7939 @cindex fatal signal
7940 @cindex assembler crash
7941 @cindex crash of assembler
7942 @item
7943 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7944 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7945
7946 @cindex error on valid input
7947 @item
7948 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7949
7950 @cindex invalid input
7951 @item
7952 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7953 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7954 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7955
7956 @item
7957 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7958 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7959 @end itemize
7960
7961 @node Bug Reporting
7962 @section How to Report Bugs
7963 @cindex bug reports
7964 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7965
7966 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7967 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7968 contact that organization first.
7969
7970 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7971 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7972 distribution.
7973
7974 @ifset BUGURL
7975 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7976 to @value{BUGURL}.
7977 @end ifset
7978
7979 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7980 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7981 fact or leave it out, state it!
7982
7983 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7984 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7985 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7986 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7987 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7988 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7989 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7990 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7991 and the most helpful.
7992
7993 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7994 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7995 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7996
7997 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7998 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7999 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8000 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8001
8002 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8003
8004 @itemize @bullet
8005 @item
8006 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
8007 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
8008
8009 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8010 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
8011
8012 @item
8013 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
8014
8015 @item
8016 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8017 version number.
8018
8019 @item
8020 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
8021 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8022
8023 @item
8024 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
8025 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
8026 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8027
8028 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8029 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8030
8031 @item
8032 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
8033 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
8034 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8035 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8036 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8037 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8038 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8039
8040 @item
8041 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8042 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8043
8044 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8045 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8046 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8047 make a mistake.
8048
8049 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8050 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8051 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8052 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8053 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8054 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8055 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8056 observations.
8057
8058 @item
8059 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8060 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8061 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8062 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8063 by line number.
8064
8065 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8066 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8067 @end itemize
8068
8069 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8070
8071 @itemize @bullet
8072 @item
8073 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8074
8075 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8076 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8077 changes will not affect it.
8078
8079 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8080 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8081 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8082 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8083
8084 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8085 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8086 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8087 less time, and so on.
8088
8089 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8090 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8091
8092 @item
8093 A patch for the bug.
8094
8095 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8096 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8097 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8098 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8099
8100 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8101 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8102 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8103 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8104
8105 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8106 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8107 help us to understand.
8108
8109 @item
8110 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8111
8112 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8113 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8114 @end itemize
8115
8116 @node Acknowledgements
8117 @chapter Acknowledgements
8118
8119 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8120 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8121 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8122 @c (October 2012),
8123 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8124
8125 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8126 more details?}
8127
8128 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8129 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8130 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8131
8132 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8133 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8134 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8135 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8136 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8137 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8138 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8139 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8140 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8141 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8142
8143 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8144 in format-specific I/O modules.
8145
8146 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8147 has done much work with it since.
8148
8149 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8150
8151 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8152
8153 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8154 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8155
8156 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8157 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8158 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8159 support a.out format.
8160
8161 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8162 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8163 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8164 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8165 targets.
8166
8167 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8168 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8169 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8170 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8171 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8172 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8173 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8174
8175 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8176 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8177 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8178 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8179
8180 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8181
8182 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8183
8184 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8185 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8186 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8187 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8188
8189 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8190 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8191 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8192 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8193 and some initial 64-bit support).
8194
8195 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8196
8197 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8198 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8199
8200 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8201 flavors.
8202
8203 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8204 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8205
8206 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8207 configuration enhancements.
8208
8209 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8210
8211 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8212 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8213 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8214 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8215
8216 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8217 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8218 @include fdl.texi
8219
8220 @node AS Index
8221 @unnumbered AS Index
8222
8223 @printindex cp
8224
8225 @bye
8226 @c Local Variables:
8227 @c fill-column: 79
8228 @c End:
This page took 0.251501 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.